Section 07100 – Dampproofing, Waterproofing & Flashing A-32 Section 07240 – Fiber Cement Siding and Composite Trim A-35 Section 07311 - Asphalt Shingles A-37 Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal A-42 Section 07610 - Sheet Metal Roofing not in specs Section 076213 – Sheet Metal Gutters and Downspouts not in specs Section 07652 – Roofing Underlayment and Sheet Flashing A-51 Section 07900 – Caulking and Sealants A-56

Section 08000 – Doors A-58 Section 08910 – Louvers and Vents A-60 Section 083613 – Overhead Doors A-66

Section 09000 – Gypsum Board – Drywall A-70 Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile A-73 Section 09900 – Painting A-82 Section 09930 - Concrete Staining A-98 Section 09940 – Staining and Transparent Finishes A-101

Section 10155 - Stainless Steel Toilet Compartments A-105 Section 10160 – Toilet Accessories A-110 Section 10520 – Fire Extinguisher and Cabinets A-111

PLUMBING

Section 220010 – General Provisions 220010-1 Section 220500 – Plumbing 220500-1 Section 220700 – Plumbing Insulation 220700-1

HVAC

Section 230010 – General Provisions 230010-1 Section 230500 – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 230500-1 Section 230700 – HVAC Insulation 230700-1

ELECTRICAL

Section 260500 – Common Work Results 260500-1 Section 260519 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 260519-1 Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding 260526-1 Section 260529 – Hangars and Supports 260529-1 Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes 260533-1 Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-1 Section 260574 – Short Circuit, Overcurrent Protection, ARC Flash Hazard Analysis 260574-1 Section 260583 – Equipment Wiring Connections 260583-1 Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices 260923-1 Section 262416 – Panelboards 262416-1 Section 262726 – Wiring Devices 262726-1 Section 262819 – Enclosed Switches 262819-1 Section 264100 – Facility Lightning Protection 264100-1 Section 264300 – Surge Protective Devices 264300-1 Section 265100 – Interior Lighting 265100-1 Section 265200 – Emergency Lighting 265200-1 Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting 265600-1

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

THE GENERAL CONDITIONS

The General Conditions, American Institute of Architects Document 201, shall be part of the Agreement, and is incorporated into the Contract Documents by reference.

Copies are available. Copies may be obtained from The American Institute of Architects via www.aia.org/contractdocs.

G-1

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1. GENERAL STATEMENT:

1.1 These Special Conditions are intended to be a supplement to the Standard General Conditions and the Supplemental General Conditions. They are not, however, intended to amend, supersede or void those documents except when specifically set forth hereinafter.

2. SCOPE OF WORK:

2.1 The intent and meaning of the Construction Documents is that the Contractor, under the terms of the Contract, shall take all action necessary and required to provide all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, transportation, facilities, and appurtenances thereto which are indicated or reasonable implied by each drawing and each Section of the Specification, all of which are collectively necessary and required for the construction of the described structure and facilities.

2.2 COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND REGULATIONS: Contractor shall comply with all recognized codes and regulations governing construction, safety precautions and other requirements. In case of conflict, the Building Code as adopted by the local governing authority and South Carolina Fire Safety Regulations shall govern.

2.3 The following work is NOT considered part of the this contract, but shall be performed by others: N/A

3. ALLOWANCES:

3.1 The Contractor shall include in his budget ‘allowance’ estimates for the following items:

A. Tile (finished and installed)(match existing) $10/sf B. Bath Accessories (including accessories shown on - $1,400 C. Hardware (door and finish) - $1,000 D. Sound System Allowance - $25,000 i. The following is the scope of works included in the Sound System Allowance for your information:

G-2

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 1. 27 70 Volt Black 6.5in two way hanging speakers a. 55Hz- 20kHz Range b. 60 Watts/31 Volts noise power c. 88 TBD Sensitivity d. 135 degree conical DMT Coverage e. 106 Maximum Continuous SPL

2. 1 4 Channel Amp a. 0.01-0.06% Typical Distortion b. 1.00% Max Distortion c. 20Hz-15kHz+-0.2dB Frequency Response d. 38.4dB Gain e. 1000w Max/Continuous per channel

3. 1 QSC Core 110F 4. 1Q-SYS Core 110 software license 5. Cisco SG350-10MP Network Switch with POE 6. 3 Ubiquiti UniFi Wireless Network Access 7. 1 Ubiquiti Cloud Key Gen2 Plus 8. 1 Middle Atlantic 16RU Wall Mount 9. 1 Middle Atlantic UD2 10. 1 Smart Sequencing Power Conditioner 11. 1 Key Switch Remote System Control for sequencing power conditioner 12. 4 Custom Wall Plates 4 XLR Inputs 13. All Cables for Access points, inputs and speakers 14. Full installation and training 15. Cable pull from existing equipment rack to new equipment a. 2 Cat 5 b. 4 22/2 16. Installer must provide all equipment needed for installation

The following contractor staff shall be assigned to the project of the successful bidder:

Lead Installer: An experienced AV system installer who has specialized in the installation of sound and theatrical lighting systems equipment similar in type and scope required for the Work of this Project. Lead Install shall have active CTS certification.

G-3

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Project Supervisor: Shall have completed Syn-Aud-Con sound system design training, be CTS Certified and be experienced in audio system installation, having at least ten years’ experience in the design and installation of audio systems similar in type and scope required for the Work of this Project.

Lead Rigger: This project requires suspending equipment over people’s heads and walk paths. Contractor Rigger Shall have completed ETCP, CM or similar extensive rigging training and certification, having at least ten years’ experience in the rigging and installation of AV systems similar in type and scope required for the Work of this Project.

Contractor Facilities and Support: Permanent facilities for rack assembly, shop fabrication, component level repair and servicing of AV systems. These repair facilities shall be located within one hundred fifty (50) miles of the installation location. Contractor shall provide 24/7 support of systems via telephone and have extensive loaner/rental equipment available in the case of component failure.

Warranty and Service

All systems and components shall be guaranteed free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance and shall be repaired or replaced within forty-eight (48) hours following report of such defects by the owner.

The Contractor shall be available on call and on twenty-four (24) hour notice during the first year following acceptance of the system, to assist the Owner and his representatives in any problems which may arise during this initial period of operation. This telephonic support, regardless of whether the issue is user-error, shall be included as warranty work and no further billing will be allowed.

If, during the Warranty period, any component is out of service for more than three (3) consecutive days due to unavailability of parts or service, Contractor shall supply and install an identical new component. If an identical component is not available, Contractor will substitute equivalent equipment, with the approval of the Owner.

During the course of the Warranty period, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) service visits to the site for inspection and adjustment of equipment.

G-4

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

4. CONTRACTORS ON-SITE TEMPORARY FACILITIES:

4.1 Temporary Office/Secured Storage Shed: Locations of any sheds and trailers shall be approved by Owner.

4.2 The grass lot at 103 West Main Street may be fenced and used for construction-staging area. Repair and regrass after construction.

5. CONTRACTOR’S TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT:

5.1 Contractor shall furnish, maintain, and remove at completion, all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, chutes and like facilities, as required for proper execution of work of all trades.

5.2 Contractor and each subcontractor, for his own use, shall provide all exterior and interior scaffolding required for execution of his work. Such scaffolding shall conform to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over such work, and be maintained in safe condition at all times. Remove when no longer required.

6. LIFTING DEVICES AND HOISTING FACILITIES:

6.1 Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain construction elevators for hoisting materials, as well as other type hoists and derricks, as may be required for execution of all trades of work. Such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet requirements of labor laws and other state or local laws applicable thereto.

7. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY DURING CONSTRUCTION:

7.1 General Requirements: The Contractor must obtain electricity for temporary service from power supplier.

7.2 Capacity and Type: The electric service shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics to supply the proper current for air conditioning

G-5

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC system, pumps and other equipment required. All necessary temporary wiring, panel boards, outlets, switches, lamps, fuses, controls and

accessories shall be provided by the Contractor. The materials used for temporary services shall not be used in the permanent system unless specific approval is given by the Architect.

8. TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES:

8.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities for the use of all personnel on the project site. Toilets shall be temporary type, complete with water and sewage connections, or shall be a portable type approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Toilets shall be removed from the premises upon completion of the project.

8.2 Permanent toilet facilities constructed in the project shall not be used by the Contractor’s personnel.

9. TEMPORARY FENCE:

9.1 Install silt fencing per civil drawings. Other fencing shall be contractor’s option.

10. LAYING OUT OF THE WORK:

10.1 All lines, grades, levels and bench marks shall be established and maintained by the Contractor, who shall be responsible for them.

10.2 Before commencing any work, the Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. He shall report any error or inconsistencies in them to the Architect before commencing work.

10.3 The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a practicing and registered Civil Engineer or a practicing licensed surveyor, who shall make all required surveys for establishing all building lines for fixing and location of all column centers, piers, walls, pits, trenches, and for otherwise fully and completely laying out all work required under this contract.

G-6

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 10.4 The Contractor shall provide and maintain well-built batter-boards at all corners. He shall establish bench marks in two wisely separated places, and give the exact level of the floor. The Contractor shall also promptly

verify and certify to lines and levels of any position or subdivision of the work at any time it may be deemed necessary by the Architect.

10.5 As the work progresses, the Contractor shall lay out the exact location of all positions as a guide for work under all divisions of the specifications.

11. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

11.1 All materials entering into construction of structures covered by this Contract shall be securely anchored and/or secured together in accordance with best quality for intended purpose. Withes of masonry and corners of masonry walls and partitions shall be bonded together if possible, unless otherwise specifically shown, and where not bonded shall be secured with appropriate metal ties or anchors. All wood, steel, concrete or other framing shall be securely anchored and tied together and to supporting or abutting masonry. All veneer finishes and applied items shall be securely anchored and tied to the backing material. Purpose of this paragraph is to ensure that, except for expansion joints or otherwise where materials are purposely separated, each and every piece of material entering into structures shall be bonded, anchored, tied or otherwise secured in place in a permanent manner that will permit expansion, contraction, and other minor movements and normal use of structure without structural features becoming impaired or loose.

11.2 All items shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with best recognized practice in field concerned. Manufactured items shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions, specifications, and/or recommendations for an installation of highest quality. All working parts shall be properly adjusted after installation and be left in perfect working order.

11.3 All items in walls, floors or roofs exposed to weather, or otherwise subjected to flooding or wetting, shall be installed so as to shed and not hold water. Items shall, in all cases, be installed plumb and true and/or in proper relationship to surrounding materials.

11.4 When standard specifications such as American Society for Testing and Materials, Federal Specifications, Department of Commerce (Commercial

G-7

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Standards), American Institute of Steel Construction, or other well-known public or trade associations are cited as standard to govern materials and/or workmanship, such specifications, or portion thereof as referred to, shall be

equally binding and have full force and effect as though it were copied into these specifications. Such standard specifications as are mentioned are generally recognized by and available to trades concerned. Architects will, however, upon request of a bidder or contractor, furnish for inspection a copy of any standard specification mentioned or direct bidder or Contractor to an easily available copy. Unless otherwise expressly stated, standard specifications referred to shall be considered as latest edition and/or revision

of such specifications that is in effect on date of invitation for bids. In case of any conflicts between standard specifications and written portion of contract specifications, the contract specifications shall govern.

12. RECEIVING MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OTHERS:

12.1 Whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor shall receive items from another contractor or from Owner for storage, erection or installation, Contractor or Subcontractor receiving such items shall give receipts for items delivered, and thereafter will be held responsible for care, storage, and any necessary replacing of item or items received. No adjustment will be made to contract price for increased insurance premiums, except for materials and/or equipment furnished by Owner and not listed as such in other contract documents.

13. APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

13.1 Approval by the Architect of substitute materials and equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to supply and install any additional materials, equipment or labor required to make the substitution properly function within the intent of the contract documents, as issued for Bid, whether or not such additional materials, equipment or labor are shown on the data submitted with the request for approval and whether or not recognized by the Architect or Contractor. The Contractor shall supply and install such required additional material, equipment or labor solely at his own expense and at no additional costs the Owner.

14. RECORD DRAWINGS:

G-8

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

14.1 In addition to prints specified elsewhere herein to be furnished by Architects, Architects will furnish Contractor one (1) complete set of

prints of general drawings. Contractor, and/or subcontractors under his direction, shall record on set of prints each and every change that is made from general drawings at time it is made. This includes any changes that are made in partitions, doors, or otherwise in arrangement or construction of building as well as a complete record of exact manner in which electrical and mechanical work, piping, etc., are installed. Dimensions shall be included where necessary to accurately locate piping and other items that will be concealed in finished building and that it may later be necessary to service. Upon completion of construction, Contractor shall turn these drawings over to Architect.

15. BALANCING AND TESTING SYSTEMS:

15.1 Unless specifically otherwise stated in these specifications, Contractor shall make all arrangements for and pay for supply of any utilities (steam, electric, chilled water or other) required to balance and/or test the various systems. Payment shall be based on meter readings verified by Architect and Owner.

16. MAINTENANCE FILE:

16.1 Contractor shall submit to Architect one (1) bound copy of complete indexed Maintenance File, clearly showing project name and construction date. Each and every device, fixture machine, control and component part used in and on the job shall be included with all information needed to operate, adjust, repair, clean and secure replacement parts in the future.

END OF SECTION

G-9

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 02830 ALMUMINUM FENCES AND GATES

A. “The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions of these Specifications, shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein. The attention of the Subcontractor of this Division or Section is directed to the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS concerning substitution of materials and equipment.”

1. GENERAL: 1.1 Section Includes: A. Ornamental Fencing B. Privacy Fencing C. Post and Rail Fencing D. Gates and Related Hardware E. Excavation for Post bases F. Concrete Foundations for Posts

1.2 Related Sections

1.3 References A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. ASD-1 – Aluminum Standards and Design 2. DAF-45 – Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 2. ASTM B 117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus 3. ASTM B 221 – Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire Shapes and Tubes. 4. ASTM B 429 – Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 5. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 6. ASTM D 1654 – Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Enviornments.

A-1

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 7. ASTM D 2247 – Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. 8. ASTM D 2794 – Impact Resistance Test (Rating up to 160 inch lbs.) 9. ASTM D 3359B – Adhesion by Tape Test (Rating = 5B) 10. ASTM D – 3363 – Firlm Hardness by Pencil Test (Rating = 2H) 11. ASTM D 968 – Abrasion Resistance

C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 1. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. AAMA 2604 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

1.4 Submittals

A. Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates and schedule of components.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square; representing actual product, color and patterns.

A-2

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Transport, handle, store and protect products so that they are in undamaged condition wheninstalled.

B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces until ready for installation.

C. Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse weather conditions.

1.7 Project Conditions

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.

1.8 Warranty

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1. Alum-Guard Ornamental Aluminum Fencing (‘Alumi- Guard’) carries a lifetime-limited warranty (‘warranty’) against defects in workmanship. Alumi- Guard also warrants the Armor-Guard powder coated finish will not chip, crack, or flake. The warranty is not transferrable and is only valid to the original purchaser. The warranty on commercial installations of fences that are purchased by other than a natural person, shall be limited to a period of thirty (30) years.

2. PRODUCTS

A-3

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Alumi-Guard, Inc: 2401 Corporate Blvd., Brooksville, FL 34604. ASD. Toll Free (877)258-6448. Phone: (352)754-8555. Fax: (354) 544-8442. Email: [email protected]. Web: www.alumi-guard.com or approved equal.

B. Substitutions: As approved upon request.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of these specs.

2.2 Materials

A. Components: 1. Fasteners, accessories and gates: match existing components, details, installation and finish.

2.3 Finish

A. Fence and Accessory Finish: 1. Fluoropolymers: Superior performance polyester power coating, medium gloss, applied to 3-4 mils thickness and complying with AAMA 2605.

B. Color: 1. Black

C. Performance: 1. Meet or exceed a 4000 hour salt spray test 2. SuperDurable Polyester Powder Coating meets or exceeds a H-2H pencil hardness in accordance to ASTM D 3363. 3. Fluoropolymers meets or exceeds a 4H pencil hardness in accordance to ASTM D 3363. 4. Meets or exceeds ASTM D 3359 adhesion test.

2.4 Fabrication

A. Match existing fabrication details. A-4

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Gates shall be fabricated using the same components for a complete fencing system. Walk gates shall have adjustable self-closing hinges and will be self-latching. (Specify style and dimensions).

C. Assembled 2-Channel 44” high fence panels/sections shall s upport a minimum vertical load of 270 lbs. at midspan. 36” high sections shall support a minimum vertical load of 500 lbs. at midspan.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 Preparation

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare the grade and remove surface irregularities, if any, which may cause interference with the installation of aluminum fence.

C. If preparation and condition is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.3 Installation

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Excavate holes for posts to diameter and spacing indicated on drawings without disturbing underlying materials.

C. Provide excavation for post length to suit local conditions for proper anchorage and stability.

A-5

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

D. Center and align posts in excavated holes to required depth. Place concrete around posts, and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Re-check vertical and top alignment of posts, verify they are plumb and level. Make necessary corrections if needed before concrete hardens.

E. If fence is deck mounted on existing hard surfaces. Set posts plumb, to tolerances specified. Locate mounting locations prior to start of work. Avoid mounting over expansion or control joints. Use non-corrosive fasteners suitable for the material to which it is to be mounted.

F. Insert notched stringers into pre-punched posts and fasten with stainless steel TEK screws.

G. Support gates from gate posts. Do not attach hinged side of gate from building wall.

H. Provide concrete center drop for drop rod retainers at center of double gate openings.

I. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. For double gates, install drop rod. Adjust all hardware for smooth operation.

3.4 Erection Tolerances

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch.

B. Maximum Offset from Indicated Position: 1 inch.

C. Minimum distance from property line: 6 inches.

3.5 Cleaning

A. Leave immediate work area neat at end of each work day.

B. Clean jobsite of excess materials; scatter excess material from post hole excavations uniformly away from posts. Remove excess material if required.

A-6

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Clean aluminum fence with mild household detergent and clean water rinse well. Mortar should be removed from exposed posts and other fencing material using a 10% solution of muriatic acid followed immediately by several rinses with clean water.

D. Touch up scratched surfaces using materials recommended by manufacturer. Match touchup paint color to fence finish.

3.6 Protection

A. protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

A-7

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 03400 MASONRY

1. GENERAL:

1.1. Wherever in the Specifications compliance with ASTM standards is stipulated, the Contractor, upon request of the Architect, shall furnish a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer or supplier.

1.2 All masonry materials used for the exterior or interior finish shall be approved by the Architect or the Owner. Submission of samples is required. The Contractor shall not order or furnish materials before approval.

1.3 Brick samples shall be submitted in panels of not less than seven bricks each panel.

1.4 Scope: The work covered by this section of Specifications includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

A. Masonry work of any kind as shown on drawings and called for in specifications.

B. Blocking up openings as necessary.

C. Parging masonry walls.

D. Installation of steel lintels and inserts.

E. Installation of bolts, anchors, sleeves, flashings nad other items furnished by other trades and requiring building-in.

F. Pointing and cleaning exposed masonry work upon completion.

A-8

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Use Congaree 551 Modular Columbia 2 by Hanson. Provide a sample with mortar for approval.

2.2 Mortar shall be Brixment or equal color mortar at brick installations. “Buff’ color (confirm with Architect) construct sample panels on site for review. Joints to be ’grapevine’ tooled. Use white sand in mortar.

2.3 Clean brick with ‘Sure-Kleen’ or approved equal. Do not use acid.

2.4 Three bricks and three joints shall be equal to 8”.

2.5 Brick veneer wall ties shall be galvanized triangular tie, minimum of 11 gauge, at 16” horizontally and vertically.

2.6 Wire mesh ties shall not be used on this project.

2.7 Horizontal joint reinforcement shall be flat units, ten to twelve feet in length, factory formed of two or more deformed side wires welded to cross wires. For cavity wall construction use adjustable tab ladder type, WB203-C by Wire-Bond or equal. For solid masonry, single wythe, use WB302, and composite use WB303 by Wire-Bond. Reinforcing shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication ASTM-A 153 class B2. Use 3/16” cross rods and parallel rods. At Corbelled masonry, use 2 ties by WireBond, ¼” hot dipped galvanized, ASTM (A-82).

2.8 Portland Cement – ASTM C-150

2.9 Masonry Cement – ASTM C-91 Non-staining cement shall be used where non-staining mortar is required.

2.10 Hydrated lime – ASTM C-207

2.11 Use clean sand, well-graded and free of any deleterious substances.

2.12 Use clean water, taken from a source suitable for domestic consumption.

2.13 Masonry reglet 26 gauge galvanized ‘original reglet’ by Fry Reglet 2777 Peterson Place, Norcross, GA complete with 26 gauge galvanized flashing by Fry.

2.14 Type Ma-Masonry 26 gauge galvanized reglet by Fry Reglet, complete with Fry Standard 26 gauge galvanized flashing.

A-9

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2.15 Gripstay Channel & Anchors, #362 and 363 hot dipped galvanized 11 gauge thick by Hoffman & Barnard.

2.16 Masonry Control Joint – CMU – install Slot Seal Standard 2015-3 by Williams Products, Inc.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 General: The work shall be done in a first class manner by experienced mechanics skilled in their trade.

3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the workmanship and for compliance with the design and specifications.

3.3 Cold Weather Installations: When air temperature is below 40 degrees F., but above 25 degrees F., sand and mixing water shall be preheated to a minimum of 70 degrees F. and a maximum of 160 degrees F.

3.4 Brick Masonry: Wet clay or shale brick with a high absorption rate. Place bricks in full bed of mortar, bottom and ends laid with shoved joint. Unfilled furrowed joints are not permitted. Fill solidly with mortar as each course is laid all vertical joints and voids between masonry and other materials, except furring and structural wood framing.

3.5 Masonry shall be plumb, true to line, with courses level. Build in all metal items and anchors as work progresses.

3.6 Install wall ties at 16” horizontally and 16” vertically. Install horizontal joint reinforcement at 16” vertically.

3.7 Lay out courses of face brick accurately, keeping bond plumb and level throughout. Variations in width of vertical joints shall be inconspicuous and made only as necessary to maintain bond.

3.8 Bond of face brick shall be laid out and adjusted to each wall so that no course shall finish at an external corner or jamb with a piece less than 3-3/4 inches long.

3.9 Parge the exterior face of concrete block to a thickness of approximately 3/8 inch, using the same mortar as used for laying brick; apply before face brick is laid. Use every precaution to insure a water-proof wall.

A-10

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3.10 Concrete masonry units shall be laid dry.

3.11 Set units plumb and true to line in regular bond and bonded or anchored to adjoining construction. Do not use broken units.

3.12 Set concrete masonry units, both bottom and ends, in a full bed of mortar with joints uniform to thickness and head joints in alternate courses plumb over the ones below.

3.13 If hollow block is used, fill with concrete all blockwork of outside walls below grade. Otherwise fill block cells and reinforce as required on drawings and structural specs.

3.14 All cutting of standard field units shall be done with a motor driven carborundum saw.

3.15 Tool exterior joints as soon as possible after mortar has taken initial set. Flush joints are not permitted for exterior brick. Cut off flush joints concealed by other finish unless specified differently. Joints in face block shall be 3/8 inch, cut off flush with face of wall and finished slight concave tooled. Joints in face brick shall be concave.

3.16 Install reglets in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install reglet and flashing after roofing is installed with weeps at 24” oc.

3.17 Install thru-wall flashing at floor junctions, at window and door heads and sills with weeps at 24” oc.

3.18 Install rope weep holes at base of brick veneer walls and at door and window headers. Use permanent weeps which are not to be removed.

END OF SECTION

A-11

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 04700 MANUFACTURED STONE

1. GENERAL:

1.1 References

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 5. ASTM C 270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C 482, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 8. ASTM E 2556/E 2556M Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet Water Resistive Barriers Intended for Mechanical Attachment.

C. Building Materials Evaluation Commission.

D. International Code Council (ICC): 1. ES Report.

A-12

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2. UBC Standard No. 14-1 Kraft Waterproof Building Paper.

E. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society.

F. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. Classification File Number 2. UL 723. Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

H. US Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) Material Release Number.

1.03 Submittals

A. Reference Submittal Procedures; submit following items: 1. Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and water resistive barrier. 2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12x12 inches (300 x 300 mm).

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications 2) Proof of installer qualifications b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report c. Test Reports for physical properties d. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions

1.04 Quality Assurance

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications:

A-13

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC a. Minimum five years experience in producing manufactured masonry. b. Member of following organizations. 1) MSJC 2) ACI 3) ASTM

2. Installer Qualifcations: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project.

B. Certifications: 1. Current ICC-ES Report 2. UL: Classification File Number 3. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. 4. HUD: Material Release Number 5. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation 6. Florida Product Approval Number

C. Field Samples: Provide in a location selected by Architect showing representative sample of installed product including penetration and termination details; corner detail, ledge, and mortar color and tooling. 1. Reference Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control 2. Minimum Size: [4 x 4 feet (1200 x 120 mm)] 3. Approved field samples may remain as part of completed work.

1.05 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions

B. Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures

1.06 Project/Site Conditions

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during and for 48 hours following installation.

A-14

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 1.07 Warranty

A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of [Substansial Completion] [Final Acceptance].

1.08 Maintenance

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes on quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer

A. Eldorado Stone LLC Tel: (803) 925-1491 1370 Grand Av., Bldg. B Fax: (760) 736-3840 San Marcos CA 92069

E-Mail: [email protected] Website: www.eldoradostone.com

B. Product and Rough Cut Cultured Stone veneer

C. Substitutions: Submit for approval (ie. Boral Stone Products, Owens Corning Cultured Stone, Coronado or Ariscraft).

2.2 Materials

A. Stone Veneer (match existing): 1. Profile: ‘Rough Cut’ (Moonlight). Include matching corner and trim/ledge pieces.

B. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight aggregates and mineral oxide pigments. 1. Compressive Strength ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39.5 sample average greater than 1.800 psi (12.4MPa).

2. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 pi (345kPa), minimum

A-15

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3. Freeze-Thaw Test ASTM C 67. Less than 3 percent weight loss and no disintegration 4. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick 5. Weight per square foot: 2012 IBC and 2012 IRC, ASTM C1670, 15 pounds saturated.

C. Weather Barrier: [ASTM D 226, Type 1, No. 30, two layers, non- perforated asphalt-saturated felt paper] [UBC Standard 14-1, kraft waterproof building paper] or [UBC Standard No 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper], or [ICC AC-38, synthetic house wrap].

D. Reinforcing: [ASTM C 847, 2.5 lb/yd2(1.4kg/m2) galvanized expanded metal lath] [ASTM C 847, 3.4 lb(1.8 kg/m2) galvanized 3/8” rib lath] [ASTM C 1032, 17 gauge (1.3 mm) woven wire mesh] [ ASTM C933 Welded Wire Lath] complying with code agency requirements for the type of substrate over which stone veneer is installed.

E. Mortar: 1. Cement: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 1329 2. Lime: ASTM C 207 3. Sand: ASTM C 144 natural or manufactured sand 4. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments. 5. Water: Potable 6. Pre-Packaged Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4

F. Bonding Agent: Exterior integral bonding agent meeting [ASTM C 932] [ASTM C 1059 Type II]

G. Water Repellent: Water based silane or siloxane masonry water repellant

2.3 Mortar Mixes

A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints) 1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270 2. Polymer modified mortar complying with ANSI A118.4

A-16

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with pigment manufacturer’s instructions not to exceed 10% by weight of cement.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.

3.2 Preparation

A. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for the type of substrate being covered.

3.3 Installation

A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for Standard Installation (Grouted Joint) or Jointless/Dry-Stacked installation as specified above.

B. Apply repellent in accordance with repellent manufacturer’s application instructions.

3.4 Field Quality Control

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative shall make periodic site visits review of on-going installation process but is not responsible for any errors or omissions that are not observed or are previously completed.

3.5 Cleaning

A. Reference Section 01.74.00-Cleaning and Waste Management

B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent work.

A-17

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Cleaning Veneer Units:

1. Wash with soft bristle brush and water/granulated detergent solution.

2. Rinse immediately with clean water.

D. Removing Efflorescence:

1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly.

2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water.

3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry.

4. If efflorescence is still visible, contact ES Customer Service for assistance.

END OF SECTION

A-18

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 06000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section. 2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this Section.

B. Section includes: Execution and completion of Rough Carpentry in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings including but not limited to; 1. Dimensional lumber 2. Wall, floor and roof sheathing.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section ‘General Requirements’ 2. Division 01 Section ‘Special Procedures” 3. Division 01 Section ‘Construction Waste Management’ 4. Division 06 Section ‘Finish Carpentry’

1.2 REFERENCES A. General: 1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall apply. 2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of commencement of the Work.

A-19

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3. Refer to Division 01 Section ‘General Requirements’ for the list of applicable regulatory requirements.

B. ASTM International.

C. American Wood preservers Association (AWPA).

D. Douglas Fir Protection Association (DFPA).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Certified Sustainably Harvested Lumber: Dimensional lumber derived from a Well Managed Forest as certified by one of the following Certification Organizations accredited by the Forest Stewardship Council: 1. Green Cross Certification Program: Scientific Certification Systems 2. Smart Wood Certification Program: Rainforest Alliance 3. Pacific Certified Ecological Forest Products: Institute for Sustainable Forestry 4. Community Forestry Certification Program: Rogue Institute for Ecology and Economy.

B. Salvaged Lumber: Lumber from deconstruction or demolition of existing buildings or structures. Unless otherwise noted, salvaged lumber shall be delivered clean, de-nailed, and free of paint and finish materials, and other contamination. Provide documentation certifying products are from salvaged lumber sources.

C. Recovered Lumber: Previously harvested lumber pulled from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned. Unless otherwise noted shall be delivered clean ad free of contamination. Provide documentation certifying products are from recovered lumber sources.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Divisions 01 Section “General Requirements” and “Special Procedures”.

B. Certificate: Provide certificate from each manufacturer stating that material is first quality, meets or exceeds the properties of

A-20

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC specified materials as specified herein, and is suitable for intended use on this Project. Where recycled lumber materials are used for structural applications or where otherwise noted, include lumber certification and quality grading.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is completed to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Project Manager. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

C. Lumber may be rejected by the Project Manager, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or old, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be properly packed and handled while in transit so as to arrive at the job site in undamaged condition. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in suitable containers plainly marked with brand and manufacturer’s name.

B. Storage arrangements shall be subject to Project Manager’s approval and shall afford every access for inspection and identification of each item. Lumber shall be piled off the ground, on skids, in a manner which prevents twisting or warping and affords proper ventilation, drainage and protection from termites and decay, rain and excessive sun. Plywood shall be protected from dampness. Material shall be protected from the elements and from damage or deterioration.

C. Damaged or deteriorated materials or assemblies shall not be used in the work and shall be replaced at no extra cost to University.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A-21

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC A. General: material shall conform to these specifications and to the applicable current editions of the Standard Specifications of ASTM and CBS. The source of new lumber shall be certified sustainable harvested lumber.

B. Lumber Grading: 1. Douglas Fir: “Standard Grading and Dressing Rules”, No. 17, West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. Plywood: U.S. Product Standard PS1 (latest edition), grade stamped and edge branded to DFPA Standards of the APA – The Engineered Wood Association.

C. Lumber Grade Marking: Each piece of lumber shall bear the official grade mark of the appropriate inspection bureau of the American Lumber Association, California Redwood Association, WCLIB, etc.

D. Lumber Size and Patterns: Surface four sides, dress sizes to UBC Chapter 23; work to sizes shown. Sizing and surfacing shall be as required and approved for the particular location, Framing shall be sized and where exposed shall be surfaced.

E. Fir Plywood: U.S. Product Standard PS1 (latest edition), grade stamped and edge branded to DFPA Standards of the American Plywood Association.

F. Dimensional lumber 2 inches (50 mm) or less in thickness shall have an average moisture content of 19 percent or less but no portion of a shipment shall be over 25 percent. Air dried lumber is desired but, if necessary, lumber may be kiln dried, however, the drying process must be slow and regulated to cause only an amount of checking comparable with air-dried stock. Wood thicker than 2-1/2 inches (3 mm) shall be well seasoned stock, moisture content not to exceed 18 percent.

G. Sills and equipment curbs which rest on concrete shall be foundation preservative pressure treated Douglas Fir or SYP.

H. Framing, blocking, backing, etc., unless otherwise shown, shall be Douglas Fir. All interior wood and plywood used for blocking and built into roofing or otherwise shown shall receive fire retardant pressure treatment in accordance with paragraph

A-22

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 2.5.B. Exterior stair framing and decking, and wood exposed to the exterior or otherwise shown, shall receive the preservative type pressure treatment in accordance with paragraph 2.5.A.

I. Dimensional lumber shall be derived from either Certified Sustainable Harvested Lumber or Salvaged and/or Recovered Lumber.

2.2 WALL AND ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood: See Paragraph 2.1 E.

B. Oriented Strand Board: Phenolic-glued low-formaldehyde board made with Douglas fir veneers and fibers. Plywood/particleboard 5 ply composite sheathing and flooring.

C. Fiberboard Sub-Floor: Structural, noise-deadening fiberboard sub-floor and insulating carpet underlayment. 1. 100 percent post-consumer recycled waste paper. 2. No added formaldehyde or asbestos.

2.3 LUMBER FASTENINGS (EXCEPT FOR PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER FASTENINGS) A. Nails and Spikes: Common Wire unless otherwise noted 1. Nailing of wood members shall conform to Uniform Building Code and/or as indicated. Box nails are not permitted. 2. Penetration: half length of nail into piece receiving point. 3. To connect pieces 2 inches (25 mm) net in thickness, 16d nails may be used. 4. Do not drive nails closer together than half their length, nor closer to edge of piece of lumber or timber than ¼ their length. 5. Spacing and size of nails to be such that splitting will not occur. Pre-bore holes for nails wherever necessary to prevent splitting. Bore diameter of holes smaller than diameter of nail or spike ( ¾ dia.). 6. For plywood nailing, barbed plywood nails, size and spacing as indicated. Nails shall have edge distances of not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 7. Use galvanized nails where exposed to weather or where members are built-in to roofing.

B. Screws: bright steel wood screws:

A-23

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 1. Screws are to be turned into place, not driven, Self-tapping where required for fastening to metal framing. 2. Countersink where heads will interfere or as required. 3. Screw bolt holes to same diameter and depth as shank; bore holes for threaded portion of screws with bit no larger than base of thread. 4. Use galvanized or cadmium plated screws on fastenings exposed to weather or where members are built-in to roofing.

C. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square or hex head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers, conforming to ASTM A307. 1. To be installed in drilled holes the diameter of the bolt. 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) to 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) over size. 2. Bolting of wood members shall conform to CBC requirements and as called for on the drawings. 3. Washers: Provide bolts bearing on wood, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, with malleable iron, or steel plate washers under heads and nuts. Do nofinal bolting until struction has been properly aligned. 4. Use galvanized bolts, nuts and washers where exposed to weather or where members are built-in to roofing.

D. Lag Screws: Conform to “national Design Specification for Stress Graded Lumber and Its Fastenings “NFPA, latest edition” 1. Lab screws shall be screwed and not driven into place. Penetration in each timber shall not be less than 2/3 of the length of the lag screw. 2. Hole shall be bored the same diameter and depth as the shank, after which the hole shall be continued to a depth equal to the length of the lag screw with a diameter no larger than ¾ of he shank diameter. 3. Washers: Provide lag screws bearing on wood with malleable iron or steel plate washers under heads. 4. Use galvanized lag screws and washers where exposed to weather or where members are built-in to roofing.

2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE (EXCEPT FOR PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER FASTENINGS) A. Provide rough hardware related to carpentry work which is not specifically called out under other headings. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

A-24

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 1. General: Fastenings, devices, and other rough hardware not specifically indicated on drawings or specified herein shall be submitted for approval prior to installation. Conform to ASTM A7 or A36. 2. Framing clips, hangers, etc.: Standard products of Universal Company, Simpson or Silver. 3. Sheet metal straps: Galvanized sheet steel of gauges and designs indicated. 4. Expansion anchors shall have a current ICC evaluation report and be size, number and type shown, installed as described in the evaluation report. 5. Powder Driven Fasteners: shall have a current ICC evaluation report and be size, number and type shown, installed as described in the evaluation report.

2.5 PRESSURE TREATMENT A. Where called for on the drawings or specified herein, exposed lumber to receive preservative-type pressure treatment shal have a minimum moisture content of 19 percent after pressure treatment and shall be pressure treated using Ammoniacal copper quaternary compound (ACQ). Preservative shall penetrate a minimum of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) deep into wood. Materials shall be compatible with stain coatings when specified in division 09 Section ‘Painting’. Fasteners and connectors used with preservative pressure treated lumber shall be G185 hot dip galvanized, Type 304 stainless steel or Type 316 stainless steel. 1. Dimensioned Lumber Posts: AWPA C-2, retention of 0.4 lbs/c.f. per quality standard for LP-22 for in-ground contact. 2. Dimensioned Lumber (all other): AWPA C-2, retention of 0.25 lbs/c.f. per quality standard LP-2 for above ground use. 3. Pre-treated lumber shall be preserved with ACQ Preserve®, Chemical Specialties Inc. 4. Field treatment shall be Boracol® or Impel® Rods, Chemical Specialties Inc. applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Subcontractor shall furnish to the Project Manager, upon delivery of the members to the job, a certificate certifying that the material has been pressure treated as specified.

B. Subcontractor shall furnish to the Project Manager, upon delivery of the members to the job, a certificate certifying that the material has been pressure treated as specified.

A-25

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

3. EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. General: Rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight and well nailed with members assembled in accordance with the drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.

B. Selection of lumber pieces: Carefully select members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects sill not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making proper connections.

3.2 WOOD PRESERVATIVE A. All exterior framing and wood trims coming in contact with concrete or masonry, whether or not Redwood, and not specified or otherwise shown to be pressure treated shall be treated with ACQ Preserve. Preservatives shall be compatible with stain coatings when specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.

3.3 SITE-APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on site cut ends and site cut wood in contact with other wood surfaces.

B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.

3.4 INSTALLATION – LUMBER AND DECKING A. Secure decking perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered over firm bearing where possible.

B. Maintain deck joints of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

C. Surface Flatness: +/- ¼-inch (6 mm) in 10 feed (3 m) maximum.

3.5 FRAMING A. Install framing in strict accordance with the requirements of CBC Chapter 23 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein or shown on the Drawings.

A-26

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

B. Optimum Value Engineering: Where indicated on drawings or, with prior approval by the Project Manager, the following framing techniques may be employed. Nothing in this Section shall super cede requirements of CBC Chapter 23 as modified by Division 01 Section “lateral Force Procedures”, or other requirements in the Drawings or Specifications. 1. Wall studs spaced at 16 inches (600 mm) on center (Verfy with Project Manager and ensure that wall finish materials can meet spans) 2. On non-bearing walls, or where upper level framing aligns with lower floor, a single continuous top plate may be used. 3. Built up headers may be used in lieu of solid lumber. 4. Frame corners with two studs and framing clips. 5. Use blocking for attachments in lie of continuous stud. 6. Delete headers at non-load bearing walls. 7. Layout framing to take advantage of sheathing or siding dimensions.

3.6 CLEANUP A. At the end of each shift and upon completion of the work, remove debris, rubbish and surplus materials from the site which resulted from work under this section. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground ore buried in fill. Take positive measures to ensure that saw dust and wood shavings do not enter the storm drainage system.

3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Conform with Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management”.

B. Separate wood waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.

C. Separate stained, painted and treated lumber from clean lumber and place in designated area for hazardous materials.

D. Separate and store separately in a clean and dry location the following categories for salvage or re-use on site:

1. Sheet materials larger than 2 square feet (1.19 m). 2. Framing members larger than 16 inches (400 mm). A-27

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3. Multiple offcuts of sizes larger than 12 inches (300 m).

E. The following categories may be re-used in the manufacture of particle board or MDF. 1. Composite wood, (for example, plywood, OSB, LVL, I-Joist, parallel strand, MDF, particleboard). 2. Clean dimensional lumber.

F. Set aside damaged wood for acceptable alternative uses, for example use as bracing, blocking, cripples, or ties.

G. Do not burn in an open fire, wood stove, fireplace or other non- industrial incinerator lumber that is less than a year old or wood treated with creosote, pentachlorophenol, CCA, ACA or other pressure treatment.

H. Separate the following categories for disposal and place in designated areas for hazardous material: treated, stained, painted, or contaminated wood.

I. Sequence work to minimize use of temporary HVAC to dry out building and control humidity.

A-28

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 06100 FINISH CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

1. GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: Furnish all architectural woodwork shown on drawings specified herein. Architectural woodwork includes all exterior and interior woodwork exposed to view in finished building, and includes plywood and high-pressure laminates. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Sections listed below shall govern the quality of woodwork materials and workmanship.

3. EXTERIOR CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

3.1 Exterior trim as identified on drawings shall be Hardietrim exterior trim as manufactured by James Hardie, Inc. or KOMA PVG Trim boards by KOMA Building Products (or approved equal) in all places where size/shape allows. Install and finish in strict accord with manufacturer’s recommendation. Prime paint all sawcuts.

4. FINISH CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

4.1 Furnish and install interior trim as necessary to complete finish carpentry work indicated on drawings. All finish work shall be in strict accordance with specified Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standard 300, custom grade.

4.2 Interior standing and running rim shall be wood species grade one (1) and two (2) popular, paint grade. Kerf cut as required.

4.3 Wood ceilings shall be 2x6, T&G, v-groove white pine, clear grade.

A-29

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

4.4 All casework shall be fir, in accordance with AWI standards 400 and 400A, Div. B, ‘custom grade’ unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Wood species for exposed surfaces shall be premium birch, select white, plain sawn/sliced, uniform light.

4.5 The ‘Quality Standards’ of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI ‘Quality Standards’.

4.6 Any item not given a specified quality grade shall be custom grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI ‘Quality Standards’.

4.7 The approved woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work. The architect reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the woodwork.

4.8 Treat all specified listed items as required by the Standard Building Code to obtain flame spread classifications required herein.

4.9 Submit shop drawings on all items of architectural woodwork.

4.10 Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the architectural woodworker, as required by the architect.

4.11 Submit samples of each wood species which is to receive transparent finish at job site, as requested by the Architect. Submit finished samples of each finish to be applied at factory.

4.12 The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions.

A-30

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

4.13 The woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

END OF SECTION

A-31

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 07100 DAMPPROOFING, WATERPROOFING AND FLASHING

1. GENERAL

1.1 This section applies generally to slab on grade and to above grade inhabitable spaces and exterior walls which shall be designed and constructed as to be adequately protected against penetration of dampness at all levels and at all times.

1.2 Scope: The work covered by the section of Specifications includes the following: A. Installation of waterproofing on outside face of concrete block walls. B. Dampproofing below grade. Installation of vapor barriers if not scheduled under other sections of the Specifications.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Waterproofing to be self-adhering membrane equal to Subseal-60 as manufactured by MFM Building Products Corp. Provide manufacturers warranty and catalogue cut sheets for approval.

2.2 Coal tar pitch, ASTM-D 450.

2.3 All materials shall be delivered in sealed containers bearing manufacturer’s brand and name.

2.4 Provide vapor barrier under all concrete slabs 6 mil polyethylene.

2.5 provide 26 gauge galvanized powder coated flashing as shown on drawings or where exposed to view.

2.6 use only one kind of bitumen, coal tar pitch or asphalt with compatible primer throughout the project.

A-32

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 2.7 30# asphalt saturated felt, ASTM-D 226.

2.8 Coal or tar saturated felt, ASTM-D 227.

2.9 Upon request by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer or supplier.

2.10 All other materials and admixtures for special types of treatment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the product.

2.11 Flexible Sheet Membrane Flashing:

Elastic Sheet Flashing/Membrane: Non reinforced flexible, black elastic sheet flashing of 30 to 40 mils thickness and complying with the following:

Shore A Hardness (ASTM D2240): 50 to 70

Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 1200 psi

Tear Resistance (ASATM D624, Die C): 20 lbs. per linear inch

Ultimate elongation (ASAATM D412): 250 percent

Low Temperature Brittleness (ASTM D746): minus 30 degrees F (minus 35 degrees C)

Resistance to Ozone Aging (ASTM D1149): no cracks for 10 percent elongated sample for 100 hours in 50 pphm (50.5 mPa) ozone at 104 degree F (70 degree C).

Resistance to Heat Aging (ASTM D573): maximum hardness increase of 15 points, elongation reduction of 40 percent, and tensile strength reduction of 30 percent, for 70 hours at 212 degrees F (100 degrees C).

2.12 Masonry thru-wall flashing shall be equal to Aqua-Flash 500 Rubberized Asphalt Flashing of 40 mil composite sheet type – consisting of 3 mils of a high density polyethylene film bonded to 32 mils of highly adhesive rubberized asphalt with a removable silicone release liner. Equal to Firestone Flashgard or York Type 60 Wascoseal.

A-33

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

3. EXECUTION

3.1 The waterproofing subcontractor shall examine the surfaces to receive waterproofing and shall not apply any materials if he considers that the surfaces are not in proper condition to receive the waterproofing.

3.2 Application of any materials shall be considered as acceptance of the surfaces to be treated.

3.3 Install in strict accord with all manufacturer’s requirements/ recommendations and best practices.

3.4 Do not apply dampproofing or waterproofing on wet surfaces.

3.5 Do not work when temperature is below 35 degrees F.

END OF SECTION

A-34

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 07240 FIBER CEMENT SOFFITT SIDING AND COMPOSITE TRIM

1. GENERAL

1.1 Scope: This section applies to Horizontal Lap Siding applied over sheathing as shown on drawings.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Exterior soffit shall be 5/16” thick Hardisoffit fiber cement panels by James Hardie, Inc. Soffit board weighs 1.9 lbs/sf and is 8’ or 12’ long, complying with test ASTM C1185 and non-combustibility ASTM E136. Panels to be smooth. Soffit panels to be warrantied for 25 years by the manufacturer. Paint saw cut ends.

2.2 Exterior trim to be 1” thick Hardie Trim by James Hardie, Inc. or approved equal. Install in strict accord with Manufacturer’s recommendation and best practices. Paint saw cut ends.

2.3 Exterior smooth panels – Hardipanel Smooth Fiber Cement Panels by James Hardie Co.

2.4 Koma Trim Boards – Exterior trim boards shall be 1” thick Koma FVC trim of width indicated on drawings by Koma Building Products 1-800- 330-2239.

2.5 Exterior horizontal siding shall be James Hardie Hardiplank LAF siding, smooth surface and shall be installed in complete accordance with MFG printed instructions for HZ10 zone. Install over two layers of 30#felt with flashing per sections and installation instructions.

3. EXECUTION

A-35

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3.1 The trim sub-contractor shall examine the surfaces over which the siding and trim will be applied and s hall not apply the materials if he considers the surfaces are not in proper condition to receive the siding or trim.

3.2 All trim to be installed in complete accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Prime all field cuts.

3.3 Warranty: The exterior siding/soffit products shall carry a limited warranty by the manufacturer, subject to Standard Limitations.

END OF SECTION

A-36

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes:

A. Granular surfaced glass fiber mat reinforced shingle roofing.

B. Moisture shedding underlayment, eave, valley and ridge protection.

C. Associated metal flashing.

1.2 Related Sections

A. ‘Flashing and Sheet Metal’ (Section 07600) for metal valley flashing, step flashing, drip edges, gutters, downspouts and other sheet metal work.

1.3 References

A. ASTM B209 – Aluminum – Alloy Sheet and Plate

B. ASTM D226 – Asphalt – Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

C. ASTM D228 – Method of Testing Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets and Shingles.

D. ASTM D4586 – Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free

E. ASTM D3161 – Wind Resistance of Asphalt Shingles

F. ASTM D3018 - Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules

G. ASTM A361 – Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process for Roofing and Sealing

A-37

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC H. ASTM B370 – Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

I. NRCA – Steep Roofing Manual

J. ARMA - Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual

K. UL 790 – Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials

L. ASTM-7158

1.4 Submittals

A. Submit under provisions of application sections.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations

C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions: indicate preparation required and installation procedures.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the roofing system products specified in this section, with a minimum of 25 years of experience.

B. Applicator: Factory-certified steep-slope roofing contractor.

1.6 Regulatory Requirements

A. Conform to all applicable local codes

B. ASTM 7158, Class H-150 MPH Wind Resistance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Roofing materials shall be delivered with labels intact in quantities required to assure continuity of application.

B. Storage at the job site should be in a covered, ventilated area – maximum temperature 110 degrees F. Store on a flat surface, to a height per pallet as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not store near steam pipes, radiators, etc., or in sunlight. All rolls must be stored on end.

A-38

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. In accordance with good roofing practice, bundles should not be dropped on edge nor should attempt be made to separate shingles by ‘breaking’ over ridge or other bundles. This is particularly important at temperatures of 40 degrees F or below.

D. Handle carefully. Shingles can be broken in cold weather or their edges damaged in hot weather.

1.8 Warranty

A. Provide GAF Timberline or equal 30-year Class “A” fire and wind rated fiberglass shingles with standard 30-year warranty.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Asphalt Shingles

A. GAF Materials Corporation product ‘Timberline’ Ultra HD shingles with Lifetime Limited Warranty. Match existing.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: shall be GAF– ridge cap shingles.

2.3 Underlayments

A. Underlayment – At Eave Valley Protection: Sheet barrier of rubberized asphalt bonded to skid resistant fine granules, 58 mil (1.5 mm) total thickness, with strippable treated release paper. Weather Watch underlayment as manufactured by GAF Materials Corporation.

B. Underlayment – Roof Deck Protection: Black Wind and Water Seal self stick roofing underlayment by MFM (55 mil) Building Products or equal.

2.4 Accessories

A. Nails: Hardened Do-All Loc-Nails as manufactured by E.S. Products Inc. of Bristol, R.I.

B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586 Type I or Type II

C. New, non-corrosive, metal step flashing, minimum 24 gauge (or equivalent) to be used as step flashing around side walls.

D. New lead boots to be used around all plumbing vents

3. EXECUTION:

A-39

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3.1 Examination

A. Inspect the Roof Deck Assembly to insure all fasteners are driven tight, all joints are taped, all trash is removed and the deck is in a broom clean condition ready to receive the asphalt shingle application.

B. Report any irregularities to the Architect and the General Contractor before starting work.

3.2 Installation – Eave Metal and Eave Ice Dam Protection

A. Place eave edge metal flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches or 51 mm and seal with roof cement. Secure flange with sheetmetal screws.

B. Apply Weather Watch or StormGuard glass fiber rubberized asphalt eave protection in accordance with GAF Materials Corporation recommendations.

C. Extend eave protection membrane minimum 2 feet upslope beyond the interior face of the exterior wall.

3.3 Installation – Protective Underlayment in Valleys

A. Install full width of Weather Watch or StormGuard underlayment directly to roof deck in all valleys. Weather end laps 6 inches or 152 mm and press firmly to seal.

3.5 Installation of Rake Metal

A. Place wind and water seal over area not protected by eave or valley protection. Install in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations

B. At all vent pipes, install a 2 square foot piece of wind and water seal.

C. At all vertical walls, install wind and water underlayment so that it extends at least 6 inches or 152 mm up the vertical wall.

3.6 Installation – Asphalt Shingles

A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

B. Install 6 nails per shingle, as recommended by local building codes.

A-40

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Install Hip and Ridge shingles per manufacturer’s instructions

END OF SECTION

A-41

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

1. GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division A and B Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 Summary: This Section includes the following: Metal Counter flashing and base flashing. Metal wall flashing and expansion joints. Gutters. Exposed metal trim/fascia units. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. Elastic flashing. Elastic roof/wall expansion joint systems. Laminated and composition flashing. Metal copings.

1.3 Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division A and B Specification Sections: A. Product Data, Flashing, Coping, Sheet Metal and Accessories: Manufacturer’s technical product data, installations and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. B. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal and accessory items:

• 8” square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.

• 12” long samples of factor-fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide complete with specified factory finish.

A-42

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

A. Shop drawings showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages details, including major counterflashings, trim/fascia units, and expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at ¼” scale and details at 3” scale.

1.4 Project Conditions: Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Materials: A. Zinc-coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A526 except ASTM A527 for lock-forming. G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359- inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated.

B. Copper: ASTM B370; temper H00 (cold-rolled) except where temper 060 is required for forming; 16 oz. (0.0216-inch thick) except as otherwise indicated.

B. Lead: ASTM B749, Type L51121, copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum 4 lb/sq. ft. (0.0625-inch thick) except not less than 6 lbs. sq. ft. (0.0937-inch thick) for burning (welding) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, alloy 3003, temper H14, AA-C22A4) clear anodized finish; 0.032-inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated.

D. Extruded Aluminum: 60063-T52; AA-C22A4; of extrusions.

2.2 Flexible Sheet Membrane Flashing A. Elastic Sheet Flashing/Membrane: Non-reinforced flexible, black elastic sheet flashing of 30 to 40 mils thickness and complying with the following:

• Shore A Hardness (ASTM D2240): 50 to 70

• Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 1200 psi A-43

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

• Tear Resistance (ASTM D624, Die C): 20 lbs. per linear inch.

• Ultimate elongation (ASTM D412): 250 percent

• Low Temperature Brittleness (ASTMA D746): minus 30 degrees F. (minus 35 degrees C).

• Resistance to ozone aging (ASTM D1149): no cracks for 10 percent elongated sample for 100 hours in 50 pphm (50.5 mPa) ozone at 104 degree F (70 degree C).

• Resistance to Heat Aging (ASTM D573); maximum hardness increase of 15 points, elongation reduction of 40 percent, and tensile strength reduction of 30 percent, for 70 hours at 212 degrees F (100 degrees C).

A. Acceptable Products:

• Neoprene synthetic rubber sheet • Butyl synthetic rubber sheet • EPDM synthetic rubber sheet

2.3 Laminated Composition Sheet Flashing: A. Copper/Paper Flashing: 5 oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of bituminous impregnated creped Kraft paper or saturated fabric.

Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

B. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Copper Fabric Laminate Flashing: • “Copper Fabric”, Arco Products, Inc. • “Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper”, Phoenix Bldg. Products, Inc. • “Copper Fabric Flashing”, Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. • “York Copper Fabric Flashing”, York Manufacturing, Inc.

A-44

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2.4 Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: A. Solder: For use with steel or copper provide 50-50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B32), with rosin flux.

B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC – Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non- drying, non-migrating sealant.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements of joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section ‘Joint Sealers’.

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.

G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.

H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper.

I. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E154.

J. Reglets: Metal or plastic units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated, noncorrosive.

A-45

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC K. Metal Accessories: provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.

L. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic.

2.5 Fabricated Units: A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA ‘Architectural Sheet Metal Manual’ and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

A. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.

B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet – type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1” deep, filled with master sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.

D. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contract, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

A-46

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC E. Aluminum Extrusion Units: Fabricate extruded aluminum running units with formed or extruded aluminum joint covers for installation behind main members where possible. Fabricate mitered and welded corner units.

F. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage: Provide architect’s color selection of manufacturer’s standard baked-on acrylic shop finish on sheet metal rain drainage.

2.6 Aluminum Copings: A. Interlocking Multi-Part Coping System: Provide manufacturer’s standard system consisting of copying formed from aluminum sheet to profile and of thickness indicated, zinc-coated steel anchor plate or cleat located at coping joint, and formed aluminum gutter chair or gutter/splice plate or compression pad/butter with pre-fabricated inside and outside corners, miters welded before finishing; without exposed fasteners.

Thickness of Coping: 0.063”

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Permasnap Coping: W.P. Hickman Co. • ME #104 “Neolock” Coping; Merchant & Evans Ind., Inc. • Snap-Loc Coping; MM Systems Corp.

2.7 Aluminum Finishes: A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components which are assembled or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is completed.

Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. High Performance Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (cleaned with inhibitive chemicals, conversion coated with an acid-chromate-flouride- phosphate treatment and painted with organic coating specified

A-47

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC below). Apply in strict compliance with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions using a licensed applicator.

Fluorocarbon Coating: Inhibitive thermo-cured primer, 0.2 mil film thickness, and thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing ‘Kynar 500’ resin, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness.

2.8 Elastic Expansion Joints: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated units of size and profile indicated, complete with prefabricated corner units, intersection units, and splicing materials. Provide complete with elastic sheet flashing forming the primary joint membrane, in a supported, ‘bellows’ arrangement designed for securement to both sides of expansion joints. Underside of bellows insulated with adhesively applied, flexible, closed-cell rubber or plastic ot less than 3/8”-inch thick.

B. Type: Metal flanged edges, 3 to 4 inches wide, formed to profiles as indicated to fit curbs and designed for nailing to curb substrate. Provide metal flanges in the following thickneses:

Zinc-coated steel: 9.0179 inch (26 gage) Copper: 16 oz. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (26 gage) Aluminum: 0.032 inch

C. Looped Bellows Width: 5 to 6 inches, exclusive of flanges.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

• Manville/Roofing Systems Division

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Installation Requirements: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units, conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and

A-48

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

D. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in a manner and by the methods indicated. Where shown in concrete, finish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections.

E. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement or by welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of sealant exposure.

F. Install elastic flashing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form a continuous, waterproof s ystem.

H. Install metal copings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect wall to ensure compliance with masonry tolerances prior to fabrication. Coordinate coping with all flashing and roofing systems to ensure that each element works properly and combined elements are waterproof and watertight. Anchor coping securely to substrates to withstand thermal stresses and loading pressures.

A-49

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

3.2 Cleaning and Protection: A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

A-50

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 07652 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENTS AND SHEET FLASHING Black Wind and Water Seal

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section includes: A. Roofing underlayments

1.2 References A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D 903- Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. 2. ASTM D 1970 – Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 3. ASTM D 2523 – Standard Practice for Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes 4. ASTM D 3767 – Standard Practice for Rubber – Measurement of Dimensions. 5. ASTM D 5147 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material. 6. ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

B. Florida Building Code: 1. FL No. 11842.1. 2. Miami-Dade County Approved – NOA 11-0826.03.

C. International Code Council – Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): 1. AC 148 Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials 2. ICC-ES ESR 1737 Evaluation Report. 3. ICC-ES-ESR 2783 Evaluation Report.

A-51

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

1.3 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including details of construction and relationship with adjacent construction.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 3 inches (75 mm) x 4 inches (100 mm), representing actual product, color and patterns.

1.4 Quality Assurance A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of specified material type with working knowledge of specified products and Project specific application requirements.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 Project Conditions A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s recommended limits.

1.7 Warranty A. Limited Warranty: Underlayments 1. Manufacturer warrants materials to be free from leaks caused by defects in material or manufacturing for a period of ten years from the date of purchase when applied according to published directions.

A-52

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MFM Building Products Corp.: 25 Orange St., Coshocton, OH 43812. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (800) 882-7663. Tel: (740) 622-2645. Fax: (740) 6722-6161. Email: [email protected]. Web: http://www.mfmbp.com

2.2 Roofing Underlayments Black Wind & Water Seal is a 55 mil. Self-adhesive mineral surface underlayment that applies directly to the roof dck. The specially formulated rubberized asphalt adhesive self-seals around common roofing fasteners. The sand surface contains a high-strength, non- woven fiberglass mat which is coated with the adhesive system. The sand surface provides an improved walking surface. Product installs under shingles, tile or metal to protect from leaks due to ice dams and blowing rain. Apply directly to the roof deck at eaves, valleys, vents, skylights and chimneys. Black Wind & Water Seal may be installed across the entire roof as a secondary water barrier with proper ventilation.

A. Self-Adhesive Mineral ‘surface Underlayment: Black Wind & Water Seal as manufactured by MFM Building Products Corp. 1. Product Model Numbers: 36 inches (914 mm) – MFM 47T50. 2. Description: Self-adhesive mineral surface underlayment; rubberized asphalt adhesive formulated to seal around nails and forms a barrier. Backed with a protective release liner which removes easily during application. 3. Release Liners: Slit in the middle for easy valley applications. 4. Granule Surface: Contains a high-strength non-woven fiberglass mat which is coated with a rubberized asphalt compound. Granules are applied to the top surface for an improved walking surface. 5. Sealing: Selvedge edge allows for a secure seal on overlaps. 6. Minimum Slope for Installation: 2/12. 7. Technical Properties: a. Material Color: Black b. Material Thickness (ASTM D 5147): 55 Mils (1.4 mm) Nominal.

A-53

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC c. Flexibility at -20 degrees F (-29 degrees C) (ASTM D 1970): Pass. d. Vapor Permeance (ASTM E 96): Less than 0.01. e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D 1970): Pass. f. Tensile MD (SATM D 1970): 42 lbs/in (0.74 Kg/mm). g. Tensile CMD (ASTM D 1970): 33 lbs/inch (0.58 Kg/mm). h. Installation Temperature: Greater than 40 degres F (4.4 degrees C).

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Examination and Preparation A. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.

B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation under substrates have been preprared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer’s recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer’s recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.2 Roofing Underlayment Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. The substrate surface shall be clean, dry and smooth. Prime masonry and other surfaces as necessary to achieve good adhesion. Coat end laps with roofing mastic to ensure a watertight seal. Mechanical fasteners may be used. Extend underlayment above the highest level water is expected.

3.3 Roofing Detail Flashing Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. The substrate surface shall be clean, dry and smooth. Prime masonry and other surfaces as necessary to achieve good

A-54

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC adhesion. Coat end and side laps with roofing mastic to ensure a watertight seal. Mechanical fasteners may be used. Extend underlayment above the highest level water is expected.

3.4 Protection A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

A-55

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 07900 CAULKING AND SEALANTS

1. GENERAL

1.1 Scope: The work covered by this section of Specifications includes the following:

A. Caulking of all exterior joints around windows, door frames, and spandrels. B. Caulking masonry joints at copings, sills and ledges. C. Caulking joints at other junctions as necessary to obtain complete air and watertight construction. D. Acoustical sealant for all wall penetrations in Building.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Caulking materials shall be as called for on the plans and in this section of Specifications.

2.2 Caulking compound shall be an elastic waterproof compound which forms a thin, tough elastic film on the surface.

2.3 General caulking of all opening in exterior wall or as noted on drawings – Tremco Spectrem 1 or Spectrem 2 caulking. Color shall match adjacent material.

2.4 General caulking of all joints for painting shall be Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk #834.

2.5 Caulk perimeter of walls, as described in 1.1 D. above, electrical outlets, mechanical ducts, etc. with Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 Seal close spaces in window and door frames and spaces too close for fiberglass insulation with Red Devil Triple Expanding Urethane.

A-56

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2.7 Fire sealants and stopping materials shall be by Hilti or equal. Assembly penetrations shall be sealed with UL approved material and method. Material and method shall met or exceed the assembly rating that is being penetrated.

2.8 Masonry Expansion Joint Sealant: In brick, install closed cell Polyethylene backer rod and one component up gun grade moisture cure Polyurethane Sealant equal to Sonolastic HP1.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Caulking shall be done by workmen experienced in this work.

3.2 Prime porous surfaces before application of the caulking, as recommended by the manufacturer of the caulking compound.

3.3 Joints and speaces to be caulked shall be dry and free from dust and loose mortar.

3.4 All joints more than ¾ inch deep and joints with a suitable backstop shall be packed closed cell Polyethylene rod to within ½ inch of surface.

3.5 Mixing of two-component material and application, using caulking gun or knife, shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.6 Finish all caulking joints with proper tool and remove excess compound.

3.7 Complete all caulking work before finish coat of paint is applied.

3.8 Acoustical Sealant: USG sheetrock brand acoustical sealant to be installed around perimeter of wall, wall openings and penetrations.

END OF SECTION

A-57

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 08000 DOORS

1. GENERAL

1.1 Upon request by the Architect, submit supplier’s certification that the doors are manufactured in compliance with Federal or Commercial Standards.

1.2 All doors subject to fire exit regulations shall be installed according to requirements of the local code.

1.4 Scope: The work covered by this section of Specifications includes the following:

A. Furnishing and installing all door frames as called for on drawings. B. Furnishing and installing all wood and metal doors as specified. C. Installing hardware furnished complete with doors by the door manufacturer; standard or optional as specified. D. Hardware; see allowances.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 All doors and frames shall be of the material, type and finish as called for on drawings or noted in specifications. All dimensions shall be as shown on door schedule on drawings. Interior wood doors shall be solid wood ‘stain grade’ flush doors.

2.2 Doors identified by manufacturer’s name and type of brand name may be substituted by others of equal quality only with the approval of the Architect or the Owner.

A-58

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 2.3 For stock item door installation, the Contractor shall submit samples for approval. For doors manufactured to order, the Contractor shall submit for approval catalog cuts or shop drawings, showing details of manufacturing and installation.

2.4 Doors delivered for installation shall be carefully stored to prevent damage or warping.

2.5 Metal doors shall be equal to Steelcrafts ‘L’ or ‘CE’ series 18 gauge size and style per drawings.

2.6 Hollow metal frames shall be steel craft or equal cold rolled steel #F16. All corners shall be mitered, welded, reinforced and ground smooth. All frames shall be shop primed and shall have one integral stop as detailed for doors. All frames shall have a minimum of three anchors per jamb and shall be prepared to receive hinges and hardware. Frames shall be UL rated as required indoor schedule or by code.

2.7 Metal door frame supplier shall coordinate with other subcontractors for proper knock-outs for hardware and other items such as security system contacts.

END OF SECTION

A-59

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 08910 LOUVERS AND VENTS

1. GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Metal wall louvers and screens exposed to view in finish work, including: a. Exterior metal louvers.

1.2 References A. Air Movement and Control Association International Inc. (AMCA): 1. AMCA Standard 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. 2. AMCA Publication 261 Directory of Licensed Products, current edition.

1.3 Coordination A. Extent: Extent of exterior louvers is indicated on drawings. Coordinate requirements, quantities, and sizes with mechanical drawings. Provide louvers indicated on mechanical Drawings as part of Work within this Section.

1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Submit Product Data on the following items: a. Each louver type. b. Each type of louver installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component

A-60

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC connections, anchorage methods, relationship to adjoining work, hardware and installation procedures. 1. Relationship to adjoining work. 2. Submit Shop Drawings on the following items: a. Each louver type. b. Each louver opening. 3. Signed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is located. a. Certifying compliance with structural requirements. b. Do not submit design calculations.

C. Samples. Submit samples for color selection of louver finishes.

D. Quality Control: 1. Certified test reports indicated compliance with specified performance requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 Quality Assurance A. Product/Material Qualifications: Provide AMCA certified rating and seal indicating compliance with specified air flow requirements.

B. Certifications: Perform structural design work of this Section under the direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is located.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Delivery materials to Project site ready use. Fabricate in as large sections and assemblies as practical.

B. Exercise proper care in handling of Work so as not to injure finished surfaces. Protect Work from damage after it is in place.

C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials that are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from Project site and replace with acceptable materials at no additional cost to Owner.

1.6 Warranty

A-61

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty.

B. Warrant materials and fabrication against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, faulty materials or fabrication developed during warranty period at no expense to Owner.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: Nystrom, Inc. 9300 73rd Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55428 PH: 800-547-2635 FX: 800-317-8770 Nystrom.com

2.2 Materials A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide required finish.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Galvanized, Bonderized Coating: ASTM A526 galvanized to G90 zinc coating.

D. Fastening: Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and zinc-coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.

E. Model LSA4D45 1. Louver Depth: 4 inch 2. Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 4.5 inch (112.5 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As follows determined by testing 48 inch by 48 inch unites per AMCA 500.

A-62

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC a. Free Area: 53 percent. b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than .16 inch water gage at an airflow rate of 1176 FPM free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 ounces per square foot of free area at an airflow rate of 1075 FPM free area velocity.

2.3 Louver Accessories A. Exterior Sill: Provide sill flashing of same material and finish as louvers where indicated on drawings.

2.4 Fabrication A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Performance: Fabricate as required for optimum performance with respect to water penetration, strength, durability, and appearance. 2. Size: Fabricate louvers in walls to meet dimensions indicated on drawings. 3. Field Measurement: Verify size, location, and placement of louvers before fabrication. 4. Shop Assembly: Fabricate to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. 5. Accessories: Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly. 6. Vertical mullions: Provide vertical mullions of type and spacing indicated but not farther apart than recommended by manufacturer. 7. Horizontal mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at horizontal joints between louver units except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. 8. Connections: Join frame and blade members to one another welding, except where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. 9. Spacing: Maintain equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

2.5 Finishes A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Shop Finishing: Factory finish louvers and accessories as following: 1. Fluorocarbon 3 Coat Coating System (with clear top coat): Comply with AAMA 605.2.

A-63

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

C. Color: 1. Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color selection chart.

D. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by louver manufacturer.

E. Selected color will be submitted for approval using same materials to be used for fabrication.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Preparation A. Coordinate size and location of cutouts in blank-off panels with mechanical ductwork installer.

B. Protection: Protect aluminum in contact with masonry, concrete, steel and other dissimilar materials from galvanic and corrosive action with neoprene gaskets or a coat of bituminous paint, applied before installation of aluminum product.

3.3 Installation A. Install louvers per manufacturer’s typical details and instructions along with advice of their qualified representative.

B. Provide necessary fastenings and anchors as required to complete installation. Install units plumb, lvele and in proper alignment with adjacent Work.

C. Form tight joints and fit exposed connections accurately.

3.4 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Adjustment: Adjust operable parts for smooth and accurate operation.

A-64

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

B. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.

C. Repair or replace damaged products.

D. Clean installed products per manufacturer’s instructions before completion.

3.5 Protection A. After installation, carefully protect work against disfiguration or damage from mechanical abuse or harmful materials.

END OF SECTION

A-65

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 083613 OVERHEAD DOORS IMPRESSION STEEL COLLECTION STEEL DOORS – 5800 SERIES

1. GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Metal Overhead Doors.

1.2 References A. ANSI/DASMA 108 – Standard Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors: Determination of Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

B. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada.

1.3 Design/Performance Requirements A. Wind Loads: Design and Size components to withstand loads caused by pressure and section of wind acting ormal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with applicable code. 1. Design pressure of 35 lb/sq ft

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doorsk tracks, motors and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

1.4 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

A-66

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop drawing: Indicate plans and elevations including opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations and installation details.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.6 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative o the manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened labeled packaging until ready for installation.

A-67

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture until ready for installation.

C. Store materials in a dry, ventilated weathertight location.

D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 Warranty A. Provide manufacturers product warranty as follows: 1. Coil away Model 600 commercial rolling steel service door. Install in strict accord with manufacturer’s requirements.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corporation, 2501 S.State Hwy. 121 Bus., Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 929-3667. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: [email protected].

B. Substitutions: As approved by Architect.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Do not begin installation until openings and substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.

C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 Preparation A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

A-68

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 Installation A. Install overhead doors, track and openers in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance.

C. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

D. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only.

E. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.

3.4 Cleaning and Adjusting A. Adjust door assembly to smooth operation and in full contact with weatherstripping.

B. Clean doors, frames and glass.

C. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.

3.5 Protection A. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

A-69

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 09000

GYPSUM BOARD - DRYWALL

1. GENERAL

1.1 Scope: The work covered by this section of specifications includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

A. All metal furring of walls, partitions, enclosures, fireproofing and any metal furring required by the drawings.

B. Gypsum board drywall installation.

C. Finishing of all walls for painting except where other kinds of finish are specified.

D. Repair of all damage to gypsum board prior to painting.

1.2 Wood furring and stripping wood grounds and closures, and wood studding for partitions are not part of this section.

1.3 Exercise every precaution for protecting the studding and drywall during its application and until properly cured.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Gypsum board shall be USG 5/8” Firecode Type ‘X’ water resistant where required behind and adjacent to plumbing fixtures.

2.2 Gypsum board shall be USG 5/8” water resistant behind and adjacent to plumbing fixtures where Firecode is not required.

2.3 Gypsum board shall be USG 5/8” where Firecode is not required.

A-70

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 2.4 Finish joints with USG Perf-A-Tape joint tape and USG Ready Mix Plus 3 Total Joint Compound, sand for paint finish, spot finish exposed fasteners with 3 coats of compound.

2.5 Gypsum sheathing shall be USG 5/8” ‘Sheetrock” brand exterior water resistant sypsum panels 48” x 8’ or 9’ long.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 The drywall subcontractor shall inspect all areas affected by his work to ascertain that all work that will be concealed by drywall is complete and has been accepted. Defective installations shall be corrected before any drywall in the area is started.

3.2 Furring. Install the furring system, partition studs, enclosures, fireproofing, according to the layout, plumb and accurately aligned.

3.3 Position and secure metal partition studs strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, using accessories fabricated for the particular type of studs. Wood studs shall be installed under other section of the Specifications.

3.4 Drywall installation. Install drywall as shown on plans, noted in these specifications and as recommended by the manufacturer for special purposes, such as fireproofing, soundproofing. Install with drywall screws as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 Installations of drywall studs and/or furring shall comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.

3.6 All gypsum board applied shall be screw attached as per manufacturer recommendations in horizontal manner.

3.7 Protect work of other trades with drop cloth coverings.

3.8 Install furring and drywall in strict accordance with UL design rating guidelines as called out on drawings.

3.9 Tape, sand and finish gypsum board as recommended by manufacturer for a Level 4 Finish as defined by National Gypsum Company.

A-71

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

4. CLEAN-UP

4.1 After completion, remove all excess materials, trash, and debris resulting from lathing and plastering operations and leave the premises broom-clean.

END OF SECTION

A-72

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes:

A. Tile and Accessories: 1. Setting Materials

1.2 Related Sections

A. Section 03 51 00 – Cast Roof Decks

B. Section 07 91 26 – Joint Fillers

1.3 References

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.1A – Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Morgar. 2. ANSI A108.1B – Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A108.1C – Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI A108.4 – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 5. ANSI A108.5 – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

A-73

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 6. ANSI A108.6 – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy. 7. ANSI A108.8 – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. 8. ANSI A108.9 – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 9. ANSI A108.10 – Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. 10. ANSI A118.1 – Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 11. ANSI A118.3 – Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile- Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile- Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 12. ANSI A118.4 – Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 13. ANSI A118.5 – Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. 14. ANSI A118.6 – Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts. 15. ANSI A118.7 – Polymer Modified Cement Grouts. 16. ANSI A118.8 – Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 17. ANSI A118.9 – Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 18. ANSI A118.10 – Load bearing Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thinset Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Stone. 19. ANSI A118.11 – Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. 20. ANSI A136.1 – Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 21. ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile

B. ASATM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 50 – Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation, Packaging and Marking of Lime and Limestone Products. 2. ASTM C 144 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C 207 – Standard Specification for Hydratred Lime for Masonry Purposes. 4. ASTM C 241 – Standard Test Method For Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic.

A-74

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 5. ASTM C 503 – Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone. 6. ASTM C 615 – Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. 7. ASTM C 629 – Standard Specification for Slate Dimension Stone. 8. ASTM C 847 –Standard Specification for Metal Lath. 9. ASTM C 1028 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction or Ceramic Tile and other like surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter Method. 10. ASTM D 4397 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.

C. The Council of North America (TCNA): TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2007.

1.4 Performance Requirements

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: Tile on walkway surfaces shall be provided with the following values as determined by testing in conformance with ASTM C 1028. 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet) 2. Step Treads: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet) 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum of 0.8 (Wet)

1.5 Submittals

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements.

B. [Product Data]: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

A-75

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

D. Selection Samples: Color charts illustrating full range of colors and patterns.

E. Selection Samples: Samples of actual tiles for selection.

F. Samples: Mount Tile and Apply grout on two plywood panels, illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

G. Manufacturer’s Certificate: 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. For each shipment, type and composition of tile provide a Master Grade Certificate signed by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that products meet or exceed the specified requirements of ANSI A137.1

H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.

1.6 Quality Assurance

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum two years’ experience.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color of tile from a single source. Obtain each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from the same source.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver and stor products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and protect from contamination dampness, freezing or overheating.

A-76

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

1.8 Environmental Requirements

A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during tiling and for a minimum of 7 days after completion.

1.9 Extra Materials

A. Provide for Owner’s use a minimum of 2 percent of the primary sizes and colors of tile specified, boxed and clearly labeled.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Acceptable Manufacterer: Daltile Corporation, which is located at: 7834 C.F. Hawn Fwy. P. O. Box 170130; Dallas, TX 75217; Toll Free Tel: 800-933-TILE; Tel: 214-398-1411; Fax: 214-309- 4584; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.daltile.com.

B. Substitutions: With approval following requests

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.

2.2 Tile

A. General: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and other characteristics indicated. Provide tile in the locations and of the types colors and pattern indicated on the Drawings and identified in the Schedule and the end of this Section. Tile shall also be provided in accordance with the following: 1. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected under Submittal of samples, blend tile in the factory and package so tile taken from one package shows the same range of colors as those taken from other packages.

A-77

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 2. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. 3. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

B. Tile Material to be provided under allowances.

2.4 Setting Materials

A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A13;6 1, thinset bond type; use Type 1 in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure.

B. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3; thinset bond type.

C. Mortar Bed Materials: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, type 1 gray or white 2. Hydrated Lime; ASTM C207, Type S 3. Sand: ASTM C144, fine 4. Latex additive: As approved 5. Water: Clean and potable.

D. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, 100 percent solids

E. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as selected.

F. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7; color as selected.

G. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.8, 100 percent solids epoxy grout, color as selected.

H. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for shower floors and shower walls.

A-78

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC I. Cleavage Membrane: 1. No. 15 (6.9 kg) asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226, Type 1 2. Polyethylene film, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mil thickness. 3. Un-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied elastomeric membrane. 4. Polyethylene Sheet Product. 5. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet Product. 6. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive Product.

J. Membrane at Walls: No. 15 (6.9 kg) asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226, Type 1.

K. Membrane at Walls: 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene film, ASTM D4397.

L. Membrane at Walls: Reinforced asphalt paper.

M. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 by 2 inch (50 by 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.

N. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, Flat expanded diamond mesh, not less than 2.5 lbs/SY, galvanized finish.

O. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and are ready to receive tile.

3.2 Preparation

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates.

C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

A-79

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer’s instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.

F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 Installation General

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer’s instructions and TCA Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than ½ width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.

G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer’s isntructions.

H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

J. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

A-80

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

K. Ground tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F132, bonded. 2. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F114, with cleavage membrane.

M. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends.

N. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13.

O. Mortar Bed Thickness: 1-1/4 to 2 inch (32 to 51 mm) maximum, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 Installation – Wall Tile

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms.

3.5 Cleaning

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

END OF SECTION

A-81

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 09900 PAINTING

1. GENERAL

1.1 Work included:

A. The painting subcontractor shall furnish all material, labor, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the finishing and application complete of all field painting and staining systems. The term ‘paint’ includes paints, enamels, stains, varnishes, lacquers, sealers, fillers and other types of coatings whether used as primers or intermediate and finish coats.

B. The Contractor shall, under this section, paint to completion all items and surfaces left unfinished by the requirements of other sections and normally requiring painting for either protection, identification and/or decoration. The sole determination to be by the Architect.

C. The Contractor shall examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with all provisions regarding painting of work done under other sections.

D. All surfaces that are left unfinished shall be painted and finished as part of this section. This includes roof top equipment, fans, ducts, etc.

E. The specialty items which are delivered with a prime coat shall be finished as part of this section.

F. The painting of all exposed uncovered pipe, exposed covered pipe, pipe hangers, convectors, grilles and other mechanical work, also

A-82

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC exposed electric conduit, panel board, pull boxes and all other electrical work requiring paint shall be included in this section.

G. The painting of all ferrous metal roof top mechanical units, duct work, goose necks, supports, hangers and brackets shall be included.

H. Exterior metal work (including rails) shall be painted to match ‘steeple’ color.

I. Touch-up painting of prime coats which have become damaged or otherwise abraded or removed during construction.

J. Condition of Substrate: Examine the substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

K. Cover or otherwise protect finishes of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

L. Items that are to be deleted and are not to receive paint coatings, are specifically detailed below, however, may not be limited to the following:

1. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, and other non- ferrous metals, exclusive of shop primed stainless steel. 2. Ceramic tile. 3. Resilient flooring. 4. Those surfaces which cannot be put into proper condition to receive paint or finish coatings. 5. Concealed ductwork, piping and conduit. 6. Operating parts of mechanical and electrical equipment including UL and rating labels. 7. Shop finished items. 8. Acoustical materials. 9. Mechanical and electrical equipment, unless specifically designated in Section 3, Painting Schedule.

1.2 Related Work:

A. Shop Primed Items: Certain items of work are specified in other Sections to be shop primed with finish painting specified in this Section.

A-83

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

B. Shop Finished Items: Certain items of work are specified in other Sections to be shop finished and do not require finish painting in the field.

C. Sealants, Section.

D. Special Coating.

E. Mechanical Identification, Section.

F. Electrical Identification, Section.

1.3 Reference:

A. ANSI/ASTM D16 – Definition of terms relating to paint, varnish, lacquer and related products.

B. ANSI CODE Z53.1 and ANSI CODE A13.1 – color and pipeline identification.

1.4 Definitions

A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Product Manufacturer: A Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with a minimum ten years experience.

B. Materials should be delivered to the job site in original, unopened containers and packages bearing and manufacturers’ labels, indicating name, type and brand. Unless directed otherwise, paints are to be delivered ready mixed.

C. Sampling of materials w hen requested by the Architect, to be obtained from material stored at the project site or at the source of supply.

A-84

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

D. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years’ experience documented and/or approved by the product manufacturer.

E. The subcontractor shall be held responsible for the finished appearance and satisfactory completion of his work and, therefore, he shall not commence any painting until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition in every respect.

1.6 Regulatory Requirements

A. Conform to applicable county, city codes for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.

1.7 Terms

A. Test samples may be required by federal, state or local governments, or if questions prevail regarding quality, at the discretion of the contracting official or architect.

1.8 Submittals

A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for all paint materials required, including certifications and laboratory reports as required to show compliance with the specifications.

1.9 Field Samples

A. Samples: Submit the following samples: 1. Opaque finishes: Match Architect’s color chips on 5”x7” primed cardboard, with color, texture and sheen duplicated to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit sample boards as necessary for selection by Architect.

1.10 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.

A-85

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Container labeling to include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperatures of 45 degrees F. (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Place paint or solvent soaked rags, waste or other materials which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the close of each day’s work. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire.

E. Protect other work against damage, marking or injury by suitable covering during the progress of the painting and finishing work. Repair any damage done.

1.11 Environmental Requirements

A. Provide continuous ventilation and heated facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Minimum Application Temperature for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. (7 degrees C) for interiors, 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Paint shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Paints, other than water- thinned coatings, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of surface moisture as determined by sight, touch and moisture meter, as specified. In no case shall paint be applied to surface upon which there is visible ice or frost.

D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

A-86

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC E. Where the paint manufacturer’s specifications or instruction differ from the above specifications, the more stringent requirements shall apply.

F. Adequate lighting must be available prior to the application of any paint coating to approximate 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.12 Extra Stock

A. Provide one gallon of each color and texture to the owner at the completion of each phase.

B. Label each container with color, texture, room locations and product description in addition to the manufacturer’s label.

C. Provide owner with paint color formula and availability information on any ‘custom’ product.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers – Paint Varnish & Urethane, Stain, Fillers & Primers, Chlorinated Rubber & Field Catalyst Coatings.

A. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the products of Benjamin Moore.

B. Substitutions: In addition to the manufacturers and their specific brands listed in the paint schedule, paragraph 3.8 for specific surfaces, the contractor has the option to use comparable quality and type of paint by manufacturers providing ‘proof of compatibility’ is submitted for approval in writing under the provisions listed in Paragraph 3.4, 3.5, and 3.67 of Supplementary Conditions.

2.2 Materials

A. All items of painting materials shall be proprietary products of specified manufacturers. Such material shall be used without adulterations and only with such thinning as called for in the

A-87

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC manufacturer’s directions. All colors scheduled shall be factory mixed, and exactly match the approved samples.

B. Materials selected for a coating system for each type of surface shall be the products of a single manufacturer, except where otherwise required by the contract documents. Where shop primed materials are to be finish painted or prime coat materials are by a different manufacturer than the finish coat materials, confirm compatibility of the primers with the manufacturer of the finish coat paints.

C. Use only primers and undercoaters that are suitable for each surface to be covered and that are compatible with the finish coat required.

D. Shellac and spot prime with industry accepted ‘stain killers’ any marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

2.3 Finishes

A. Refer to the schedule at end of Section for surface (and color) schedule.

3. FINISHES

3.1 Inspection

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Paragraph 3.2, preparation of Surface.

B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable. Report any conditions that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Measure the moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless the moisture content of surface is acceptable to receive the specified paint coating material.

A-88

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC D. Beginning of application of any paint or primer coating means acceptance of existing surfaces or substrate.

3.2 Preparation

A. Remove or protect hardware, plates, trim for mechanical work, lighting fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting. Disconnect equipment adjacent to walls, where necessary, and move to permit painting of wall surfaces. Following completion of painting, replace and reconnect.

B. Clean all surfaces to be painted as required to remove dust and dirt. Sand as necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive paint or natural finish.

C. Before applying succeeding coats, primers and undercoats shall be completely integral and shall perform the function for which they are specified. Properly prepare and touch up all scratches, abrasions or other disfigurements and remove any foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. All spot-priming or spot-coating shall be featheredged into adjacent coating to produce a smooth and level surface.

D. Do not apply final coats until after other work with operations that would be detrimental to finish painting have been finished in the area to be painted and the areas have been released for painting.

E. Shellac and spot prime with industry accepted ‘stain killers’ any marks which may bleed through surfaces finishes.

F. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate, water and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply a latex based, compatible sealer or primer.

H. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton using high pressure air and solvent cleaner as required to obtain a sealing coat.

A-89

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC I. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.

J. Copper Surfaces: 1. Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam, water, high pressure or solvent washing. 2. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry.

K. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of applicable primer.

L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touchup patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime base steel surfaces.

M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats and wipe off dust.

N. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

O. Concrete & Concrete Masonry Units: Thoroughly clean concrete surfaces of all loose particles, sand, efflorescense, form oil, curing compounds or other contaminants by appropriate methods and be sure surface is dry before any paint is applied. Methods of surface preparation and cleaning shall be determined by the Contractor as required in each case to ensure satisfactory paint application and performance.

P. Gypsum Drywall: Repair all surface defects in gypsum drywall with drywall joint finishing compound or spackling compound filled out flush and sanded smooth. Clean all surfaces and taped joints of dust,

A-90

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC dirt and other contaminants and be sure they are thoroughly dry before applying paint.

Q. Gypsum Plaster:

1. Cut out cracks, holes, indentations and other imperfections in plaster surfaces to the extent necessary to provide a good bonding surface. Fill with patching plaster or spackling compound, and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces with the fine sandpaper.

2. Before applying paint, clean plaster surfaces of all dirt, dust, grit and other contaminants. Verify that surfaces are dry and that the moisture content does not exceed 15 percent when measured by a moisture meter.

R. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied.

S. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.3 Protection

A. Protect the work of all trades against damage or injury by use of suitable covering during the progress of the painting and finishing work.

B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section.

C. Remove empty paint containers from the work site.

D. Post ‘No Smoking’ and ‘Wet Paint’ signs as required or directed.

E. Provide, sand, extinguishers and other protective equipment in the event of a fire created by any paint related rags or materials.

3.4 Application

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Do not apply coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by the paint manufacturer’s test with moisture meter.

A-91

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Apply paint, enamel, stains and varnishes with suitable brushes, rollers or spray equipment which has been kept clean, free from contamination and suitable for finish required.

D. Rate of application of coating shall not exceed that as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the purpose and surface involved.

E. Comply for required drying time between coats as directed by manufacturer.

F. Sand dust between each coat to remove defects visible from 5 feet. Finish coats shall be smooth, free from brush marks, streaks, laps, sags, skips, holidays, etc.

G. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by the Architect. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied.

H. Make edges of paint adjoining other material or colors celan and sharp with no overlapping.

I. Apply primer on all work before glazing or caulking. Paint must overlap glass 1/16 inch on all coats.

J. Change colors at door stop corner where colors differ between adjoining spaces or rooms and where door frames match wall colors.

K. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

L. Back prime all interior wood trim.

M. Stained and natural finishes shall be adjusted to obtain identical appearance.

3.5 Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment

A. Refer to ANSI Code A53.1 and A13.1 for color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit.

B. Access panels, electrical panels, air diffusing outlets, supply and exhaust grilles, louvers, exposed conduit, primed outlet covers, primed wall and ceiling plates and other items in painted areas shall be painted to match the areas in which they occur unless specified otherwise in the schedules.

A-92

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Paint the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers. Do not paint nameplates on equipment.

D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.

E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

G. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.6 Cleaning

A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or splattered.

B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

3.7 Schedule – Shop Primed Items for Site Finishing

A. Metal fabrications including exposed surfaces of lintels and ladders.

B. Metal rails.

3.8 Schedule – Exterior Surfaces

A. Pavement Markings

1. Two Coats: Duron Alkyd Traffic Zone Paint, 30-series

B. Concrete, Concrete Block

1. Flat Finish, Acrylic Latex Base

One Coat: Block filler – Benjamin Moore Super-Hide Block Filler, 285

A-93

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Two Coats: Acrylic flat house paint – Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Flat Latex House Paint

2. Semi Gloss Finish, Acrylic Latex Base

One Coat: Block filler – Benjamin Moore Super-Hide Block Filler, 285 Two Coats: 100% Acrylic medium gloss house and trim paint – Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Latex House Paint #170

C. Steel - Unprimed

One Coat: Rust inhibitive metal primer – Benjamin Moore Iron clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint 163 OR Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Latex House Paint #171

D. Steel-Shop Primed

One Coat: Benjamin Moore Iron clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint 163 OR

Benjamin Moore Moorglo Latex House and Trim Paint Two Coats: Duron Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel, Urethane Modified, 12- series.

F. Steel, Galvanized

One Coat: Benjamin Moore Iron clad #155

Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Impervo Enamel #133

G. Aluminum-Mill Finish

A-94

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Imperves Enamel #309

H. Copper

One Coat: Zinc chromate metal primer – Zinc Chromate Metal Primer, Benjamin Moore

One Coat: Gloss enamel – Benjamin Moore Impervo High Gloss Enamel #133

3.9 Schedule-Interior Surfaces:

A. Wood

1. Painted (Semi Gloss Finish)

One Coat: Alkyd Benjamin Moore Underbody 217

Two Coats: Acrylic Latex Semi-gloss – Benjamin Moore Alkyd Dulmer 207 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

B. Concrete, Concrete Block

1. Painted, Flat Finish

One Coat: Acrylic latex block filler

Two Coats: Acrylic latex flat finish – Benjamin Moore Regal Wall Stain 215 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams

2. Painted, Semi Gloss Finish

One Coat: Acrylic latex block filler Benjamin Moore 173 or equal

A-95

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

Two Coats: Acrylic Latex Semi-gloss – Benjamin Moore Regal Wall Satin 215 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

C. Steel Unprimed

One Coat: Rust inhibitive metal primer – Benjamin Moor Iron Clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint 168 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Quik Dry 071 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

D. Steel – Primed

Touch Up With Benjamin Moore Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint 168 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Quik Dry Enamel 017 or equal product by Porter or Sherwin Williams.

E. Plaster, Gypsum Board

1. Latex Scrubbable Eggshell Finish

One Coat: 100% acrylic drywall sealer or based primer byAcrylic latex flat – Benjamin Moore Flat Vinyl Latex, Moorcraft 273 Two Coats: Benjamin Moore Vinyl Latex Flat 275 100% Acrylic Latex paint by Porter, Benjamin Moore or

A-96

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Sherwin Williams. Finish shall be scrubbable eggshell.

2. Schedule - Colors

To be selected by Owner/Architect.

END OF SECTION

A-97

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 09930 CONCRETE STAINING

1. GENERAL

1.1 Summary

A. This Section specifies an applied stain and sealer for horizontal cast- in-place concrete surfaces.

B. Related Sections: Refer to Section 03302 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

B. Mock-Up: Prepare a test area minimum 2x2 feet in size to verify suitability of the stain, sealer and final appearance.

1.3 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience producing concrete coatings.

B. Installer: Licensed installers, experienced and trained in the use of these products.

C. Suitability of Substrate: Do not apply to concrete surfaces which may have insufficient chemical reaction, including older or weather concrete, concrete subject to runoff or weathered concrete, or heavily sandblasted concrete.

A-98

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and applicable codes at the location of the project.

1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Protect from damage.

B. Store in a safe place, out of direct sunlight. Keep containers tightly sealed. Do not allow product to freeze. Use within manufacturer’s shelf life, approximately 12 months.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

A. Concrete Stain: Vivid Acid Stain by Concrete Coatings, Inc., 1105 North 1600 West, Layton, UT 84-41, 800-443-271, www.concretecoatingsinc.com or equal. The concrete stain shall have the following properties:

1. Type: Penetrating chemical stain which chemically reacts with concrete. 2. Stain Colors: Jade, Turquoise, Coffee, Amber, Mahogany, Ebony, Mission Brown, Caramel, Olive, Walnut and Weathered Terracotta. Note that Turquoise and Jade colors are not suitable for slab concrete or areas subject to water from the sub-grade or standing water. 3. Coverage: 200-300 square feet of concrete surface per gallon.

B. Concrete Sealer: Sealer by Concrete Coatings Inc., 1105 North 1600 West, Layton UT 84041, 800-443-2871, www.concretecoatingsinc.com or equal.

1. Type: CCI SuperSeal 2000, 650 voc. 2. Type: CCI GemKote High Gloss Sealer, meets 100, 350 and 400 voc requirements. 3. Coverage: As recommended by manufacturer.

3. EXECUTION

A-99

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 3.1 Preparation

A. Inspection: Prior to start of application, inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable for installation including the following:

1. Concrete has cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of stain. 2. Surface is completely free of sealers, oils, dirt, paint, alkali, penetrating sealers and foreign materials that would prevent the stain from penetrating the concrete surface. 3. Concrete has been swept clean. 4. Test area has been approved.

3.2 Application

A. Concrete Stain: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation recommendations including the following:

1. Use experienced installers wearing protective clothing and breathing apparatus. 2. Test surface for suitable reactivity. 3. Protect adjacent areas from over-spray, runoff, spills and tracking prior to application. 4. For areas requiring material from more than one container, mix together prior to application to avoid color variation. 5. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer. 6. Clean, rinse and neutralize surface.

B. Concrete Sealer: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation recommendations. Apply after stain has dried at rate recommended by manufacturer. Clean surface as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 Cleaning and Protection

A. Protection: Do not cover, but protect floor from paint and other contaminates that could inhibit the stain.

END OF SECTION

A-100

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 09940 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section includes:

A. Exterior Coatings: 1. Clear finish exterior coatings. 2. Translucent finish exterior coatings. 3. Semi-transparent finish exterior coatings. 4. Solid hide finish exterior coatings.

B. Coatings for Interior Wood Surfaces: 1. Clear finish coatings for interior wood surfaces. 2. Translucent finish coatings for interior wood surfaces.

1.2 Submittals

A. Submit under provisions of Administrative Requirements.

C. Selection Samples: Submit two sets of samples showing available colors, textures, and finishes.

D. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, representing colors, textures, and finishes to be installed.

1.3 Quality Assurance

A-101

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

A. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship: 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Store materials within absolute limits for temperature and humidity recommended by the manufacturer. Protect from damage.

B. Store products in manufacturer’s labeled packaging until ready for installation.

1.5 Project Conditions

1.6 Warranty

A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard limited warranty for materials and workmanship.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sikkens; Wood Finishes, which is located at: 15885 W. Sprague Rd., Strongville, OH 44136; Toll Free Tel: 866-745-3567, Fax: 800-784-5460; Email: requestinfo([email protected]); Web: www.perfectwoodstains.com .

A-102

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC B. Substitutions: for approval by architect.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of these specifications.

D. Coating Type: Sikkens Log & Siding #078 Natural. Apply to 2x6 ceiling.

2.2 Coating Application and Schedule

A. Hand brush two (2) coats (no spraying)

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer’s recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer’s recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

3.2 Installation

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, including the following:

1. Test moisture content of wood substrates to confirm it is within manufacturer’s recommended limits for the coating type required. 2. Remove hardware and similar items to allow continuous coverage to the greatest extent practical. 3. Clean substrate of dirt, dust and other debris. Remove temporary markings and lables. 4. Countersink nails if raised above the surface to be coated, fill holes.

A-103

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC 5. Apply to achieve uniform appearance, free of lap marks, bush marks and other imperfections.

3.3 Protection

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

A-104

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 10155 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

1. GENERAL

1.1 Description

A. Stainless steel compartment work includes the following: 1. Floor anchored/overhead-braced partitions.

B. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the completion of work in this section as shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

C. Work in this section shall include but is not limited to: 1. Toilet compartments. 2. Hardware for toilet compartments 3. Shop drawings and working drawings. 4. Manufacturer’s guarantee.

D. Related work specified elsewhere shall include accessories and anchorage/blocking for attachment of compartments.

1.2 Products

A. Submittal of shop drawings and details, for architect’s approval.

B. A sample of #4 satin finish stainless steel and hardware samples shall be submitted for approval to the architect upon request.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

A-105

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

A. Doors and panels shall be 1” thick, constructed of two sheets of 22- gauge, stretcher-leveled quality stainless steel formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a resin-impregnated, sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core.

B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4”, constructed of two sheets of 22-gauge stainless steel, formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a full resin-impregnated, sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core.

2.2 Construction

A. Doors and panels shall be 1” thick. The perimeter shall be sealed with a 22-gauge stainless steel interlocking molding. Molding corners shall be welded to each other and to face sheets and ground smooth to form a rigid frame around the component.

B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4” thick. The perimeter shall be sealed with a 22-gauge stainless steel interlocking molding. An inverted stirrup with a jack bolt for leveling during installation and permanent height adjustment shall be welded within the base of each pilaser. ‘L’ brackets shall be coupled to the stirrup bracket and floor for full range adjustment. A shoe shall conceal each mounting, having an internal cross section conforming to the pilaster, and being formed of type 304 stainless steel #4 finish.

C. Headrail shall be provided to bridge all compartments and brace the end freestanding pilasters to the wall; the headrail shall be anodized aluminum satin finish contoured to provide anti-grip feature.

2.3 Hardware (NOTE: Refer to the ORDER INFORMATION CONTRACT for specific hardware to be supplied on your order.)

A. All exposed door hardware shall be as noted:

1. Chromium plated die cast zamac hinge shall have gravity acting cam and wrap around flanges. Upper and lower door hinges are recessed. Door hardware shall include a coat hook, bumper, stop, keeper, a concealed latch with emergency access and chromium plated vandal resistant fasteners.

A-106

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

2. Optional: Stainless steel die cast hinge shall have gravity acting cam and wrap around flanges. Upper and lower door hinges are recessed. Door hardware shall include a coat hook, bumper, stop, keeper, a concealed latch with emergency access and stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners.

3. Optional: Continuous stainless steel hinge. Door hardware shall include a coat hook, bumper, stop, keeper, a concealed latch with emergency access and stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners.

B. Panel and pilaster brackets shall be as noted:

1. Stirrup brackets shall be 2- 1/8” long chromium plated die cast zamac. Stirrup brackets shall be 1/8” thick and mounted with chrome plated steel vandal resistant fasteners. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with 2-1/2” chrome plated steel vandal vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

2. Optional: Stirrup brackets shall be 2-1/8” long die cast stainless steel. Stirrup brackets shall be 1/8”thick and mounted with stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with 2-1/2” stainless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

3. Optional: Continuous heavy duty anondized extruded aluminum (6063-T5 alloy) wall brackets are mounted with stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with 2-1/2” stainless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

4. Optional: Continuous heavy duty stainless steel wall brackets are predrilled. Wall brackets are mounted with stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with 2/1/2” stanless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

A-107

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC C. Pilaster shoes shall be stainless steel 3” high with a #4 satin finish.

D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty anodized extruded aluminum (6063-T5 alloy). Headrail is anti-grip and attaches to the top of the pilaster with stainless steel vandal resistant screws.

E. Headrail brackets shall be made from a die cast aluminum alloy and shall be attached ot the adjacent wall construction with 2- 1/2” stainless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

A. Examine areas to receive toilet compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that may affect installation of compartments. Report any discrepancies to the architect.

B. Take complete and accurate measurements of toilet compartment locations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job.

3.2 Installation

A. install compartments in a rigid, straight, plumb and level manner as shown on the shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. All doors and panels to be mounted at 12” above the finished floor unless otherwise specified.

C. Clearance at vertical edges of door shall be uniform top to bottom.

D. No evidence of cutting, drilling and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work.

E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections.

3.3 Warranty

A-108

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC Global Partitions guarantees its stainless steel units, properly maintained, against corrosion or discoloration for 5 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If materials are found defective during that period for the reasons listed above, the material will be replaced free of charge. No credits or allowances will be issued for any labor or expenses relating to the replacement of components covered under the warranty plan. All such expenses are to be borne by the buyer.

END OF SECTION

A-109

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 10160 TOILET ACCESSORIES

1. GENERAL

1.1 Scope: The work by this section of specifications includes the following:

A. Toilet Accessories.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 All specialty items shall be shown on drawings, called for in the Specifications and identified by manufacturer and brand name.

2.2 Submit for Architect’s approval shop drawings, catalog cuts and color chips.

2.3 Items shall be installed with manufacturer supplied anchors, supports and attachment methods.

2.4 Toilet Accessories (including mirrors and grab bars) shall be as per allowance stated in contractor’s proposal. Provide blocking for all items and install as per manufacturer required.

2.5 Toilet signage shall be as per allowance stated in contractor’s proposal.

END OF SECTION

A-110

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

1. GENERAL

1.1 Scope: Provide all material, equipment and services necessary to provide to the job site all fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on the drawings and specified hereinafter.

1.2 Related Work: Installation of fire extinguisher cabinets is by the carpentry contractor. Section 06100.

1.3 Submittals: Immediately upon receipt of a purchase order this supplier shall prepare shop drawings and submit same to the Architect for approval. Submittals shall include cut sheets, specifications, certified rating for all extinguishers and rough-in for cabinets.

1.4 Delivery and Handling: This supplier shall deliver all materials to the job site, unload and store in an area as directed by the General Contractor. Any damaged materials shall be replaced by this supplier at his own expense. After storing is completed the materials become the responsibility of the General Contractor.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

A. Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be as manufactured by Larsen with approved equals by Norris, Kidde, Seco or approved equal. Cabinets shall be semi-recessed Model 2409-6R. Units shall be full glass door with white baked enamel finish. Locate as approved by Fire Marshall.

A-111

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PAVILION LEXINGTON, SC

B. Fire extinguishers shall be as supplied by Larsen or approved equal as listed in paragraph (1). Extinguishers shall be 10 lb., UL rating.

END OF SECTION

A-112

TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 220010 GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE:

A. Bids of work covered by each section of these specifications shall be based on the layout and equipment as shown and specified with only such approved substitutions as are allowed. Drawings show general arrangement of piping. Because of small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories, which may be required. Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Where locations make it necessary or desirable from Contractor's standpoint to make changes in arrangements or details shown on drawings, he may present suggestions for such changes and obtain Engineer's approval prior to making such changes.

1.2 CODES:

A. All work under this division shall be in strict compliance with the International Building Code – 2015 Edition, the International Plumbing Code – 2015 Edition, the International Fuel Gas Code – 2015 Edition and all applicable Codes and Regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.3 MATERIAL AND SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Use only new materials and the standard product of a single manufacturer for each article of its type unless specifically mentioned otherwise. Materials and workmanship in the case of assembled items shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ASME, NEC, ASTM, AWWA, NEMA, and ANSI.

B. Schedule submittals to expedite work. Unless otherwise indicated in this Section, submittals shall be submitted within 30 days of date of Notice to Proceed. Provide electronic copies of submittals for review and approval. All submittals shall be emailed in a single volume. Partial lists will not be considered and will be returned to the Contractor. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, pertinent drawing sheet and detail numbers, and associated specification section numbers. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

Any submittal that exceeds 10 MB shall be transferred using Dropbox or other similar file sharing service.

C. Contractor responsibilities:

1. Review submittals prior to transmittal. Verify compatibility with field conditions and dimensions, product selections and designations, quantities, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. Return non-conforming submittals to preparer for revision rather than submitting to Engineer. Coordinate submittals to avoid conflicts between various items of work. Failure of Contractor to review submittals prior to transmittal to Engineer shall be cause for rejection. Incomplete, improperly packaged, and submittals from sources other than Contractor will not be accepted. Submittals not stamped APPROVED and signed by the Contractor will be returned to the Contractor.

2. Provide product data such as manufacturer's brochures, catalog pages, illustrations, diagrams, tables, performance charts, and other material which describe appearance, size, attributes, code and standard compliance, ratings, and other product characteristics. Provide all critical information such as reference standards, performance characteristics, capacities, power requirements, wiring and piping diagrams, controls, component parts, finishes, dimensions, and required clearances. Submit only data which are pertinent. Mark each copy of manufacturer's standard printed data to identify products, models, options, and other data pertinent to project.

3. Engineer will review and return submittals with comments. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Engineer acceptance. Promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. Revise and resubmit submittals as required within 15 days of return from Engineer. Make re-submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.

D. Engineer Review:

1. Engineer will review submittals for sole purpose of verifying general conformance with design concept and general compliance with Contract Documents. Approval of submittal by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for correcting errors which may exist in submittal or from meeting requirements of Contract Documents. After review, Engineer will return submittals marked as follows to indicate action taken:

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. No Exception: Part of work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. The term "approved" shall only indicate that there is no exception taken to the submittal.

3. No Exception As Corrected: Part of work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract documents. Final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

4. Revise And Resubmit: Do not proceed with part of work covered by submittal including purchasing, fabricating, and delivering. Revise or prepare new submittal in accordance with notations and resubmit.

E. Items Requiring Submittal are as Follows:

1. Insulation 2. Piping Materials 3. All items listed in MANUFACTURERS: Section of 220010

1.4 LEAD FREE:

A. All solder, flux and pipe used in water system must be lead free. Lead free is defined as less than 0.2 percent lead in solder and flux and less than 8.0 percent lead in pipes and fittings.

1.5 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT:

A. All items or work under this division of the specifications shall comply with guidelines as set forth in the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.6 PERMITS AND FEES:

A. Obtain permits, licenses, pay fees, etc. as required for performance of Contract. Arrange for necessary inspections required by governing authority and deliver certificates of approval to Architects or their representatives. File plans required by governing body.

1.7 DEFINITIONS:

A. In this division of the specifications and accompanying drawings, the following definitions apply:

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Provide: To purchase, pay for, transport to the job site, unpack, install, and connect complete and ready for operation; to include all permits, inspections, equipment, material, labor, hardware, and operations required for completion and operation.

C. Install (Installed): To furnish and install complete and ready for operation.

D. Furnish: To purchase, pay for, and deliver to the job site for installation by others.

E. The Plumbing Contractor is cautioned that "furnish" requires coordination with others. Such coordination costs shall be included as part of Plumbing Contractor's bid.

1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Cutting of walls, floors, roofs, partitions, and ceiling, required for proper installation of the systems shall be performed under this contract.

B. Cutting shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. No joist, beams, girders, columns, or other structural members may be cut without written permission from the Engineer. When possible, holes shall be saw-cut or core drilled neat to minimize patching.

C. Re-routing of existing pipes, insulation, etc. as required for installation of new system is included in this work. All work shall be done in accordance with specifications for new work of the particular type involved.

D. Patching shall be performed to match existing structures, exterior walls and roofs, and shall form watertight installation.

1.9 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS, ETC.:

A. The Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work, working conditions, verify all dimensions in the field, advise the Engineer of any discrepancy, and submit shop drawings of any changes he proposes to make in quadruplicate for approval before starting the work. Contractor shall install all equipment in a manner to avoid building interference.

1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES:

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

proposed equipment can be accommodated. Before beginning work under each section, inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where the installation may properly begin.

1.11 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK:

A. Protect work and adjacent work at all times with suitable covering. All damage to work in place caused by Contractor shall be repaired and restored to original good and acceptable condition using same quality and kinds of materials as required matching and finishing with adjacent work.

1.12 FIRESTOPPING:

A. Provide firestopping for all mechanical penetrations through fire resistant walls and shaft enclosures, and floor, ceiling, and roof elements of fire resistant assemblies. Firestopping shall provide rating comparable to rating of structure it protects.

B. Firestopping materials currently classified with UL as "Through Penetration Firestop Systems".

C. Firestopping materials shall have been tested in accordance with UL 1479 "Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops".

1.13 CLEAN-UP:

A. At the completion of the contract work, all areas where work has been performed shall be left clean. All trash shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.

1.14 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, or type of construction which, in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

engineering information as necessary to fully identify and evaluate the product. No increase in the contract sum will be considered when requests are not approved.

1.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. The Contractor shall keep a record set of drawings on the job; and as construction progresses shall show the actual installed location of all items, material, and equipment on these job drawings. Indicate approved changes in red ink.

B. At the time of final completion, a corrected set of As-Built drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer. A final set of reproducible drawings with job information that reflects the actual installation shall be prepared by the contractor and given to the Owner.

1.16 WARRANTY:

A. The Contractor for each section of the work under this division will furnish to the Owner a written warranty for the installation as installed, to perform in a quiet, efficient, and satisfactory manner with no more than normal service.

B. Each warranty shall extend for a period of one year following substantial completion and acceptance of construction. They shall be endorsed by the Contractor.

1.17 MANUFACTURERS:

A. In order to define requirements for quality and function of manufactured products, and requirements such as size, gauges, grade selection, color selections and like specifications requirements, the specifications as written hereinafter are based upon products of those manufacturers who are named hereinafter under various specifications for materials.

B. In addition to products of manufacturers named hereinafter in the specifications, equivalent products of the following named manufacturers will be acceptable under the base bid:

1. Insulation:

a) Owens Corning, Johns Manville, CertainTeed Corporation, Knauf Insulation

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. Valves:

a) Crane Company, Grinnell Company, O.I.C. Valve Co., Chase Brass & Copper Company, Rockwell Manufacturing Company, Consolidated Brass Company, Hammond, Nibco.

3. Pipe Hangers:

a) Cooper B-Line, Fee and Mason Manufacturing Company, Anvil International, Erico Caddy, Tolco a Division of Nibco

4. Plumbing Fixtures:

a) Kohler Company, American-Standard Plumbing & Heating Division Company, Zurn Industries

5. Flush Valves:

a) Sloan Valve Company, Coyne & Delany Company, Zurn Industries (PL Model only)

6. Water Closet Seats:

a) Church Seat Company, Beneke, Olsonite Corp., Bemis Mfg. Co., Centoco

7. Floor Drains, Cleanouts, Interceptors, Etc.:

a) Wade, Inc., Zurn Industries, Inc., Josam Manufacturing Company, Jay R. Smith

8. Dielectric Fittings:

a) Capitol Manufacturing Company, Dresser Manufacturing Company, Epco Sales, Inc.

9. Identification Items:

a) Seton Name Plate Company, W.H. Brady Company, Handley Industries, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTING:

A. Furnish touch up paint supplied by equipment manufacturer.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Coat ferrous metal surfaces that do not have factory painting or galvanizing with one coat of Sherwin Williams high heat aluminum paint.

2.2 VALVES:

A. All valves provided under each section shall be of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. All valves shall be of listed manufacturer as scheduled hereinafter in other sections of Division 22.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS:

A. The material used to fill the annular space shall prevent the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E 119 time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water at the location of the test specimen for the time period equivalent to the fire resistance rating of the construction penetrated. Material shall be capable of curing in the presence of atmospheric moisture to produce durable and flexible seal, and will form airtight and watertight bonds with most common building materials in any combination including cement, masonry, steel, and aluminum.

2.4 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS:

A. Provide UL certified fire stop sleeving system for all pipe penetrations through fire rated walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, floor-ceiling assemblies and roofs as tested under ASTM E814-02 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops".

2.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:

A. Seismic restraints shall be provided per International Building Code Chapter 16 for Category D Buildings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:

A. To accommodate mechanical work execute all excavation, trenching, shoring and backfilling in excess of that required for structures. Coordinate this work with that required for structures, and schedule such work to be consistent with other construction work. All work shall be in compliance with OSHA safety standards.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 8 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Perform all excavations of every description and whatever substances encountered, to depths indicated, or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled a sufficient distance from banks of trench in an orderly manner. Avoid overloading to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed and wasted as indicated on drawings or as directed. Execute such grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Any water accumulating therein by surface flow, seepage or otherwise, shall be removed by pumping or by other approved method. Such sheeting, bracing and shoring shall be done as may be necessary for protection of work and for safety of personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut. Short section of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the pipe can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. Excavation shall be considered as unclassified and shall be executed complete.

C. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of adequately supporting pipe is encountered in trench bottoms, remove such material to depth required and replace to the proper grade with selected material compacted as hereinafter specified for backfilling of pipe.

D. Bedding surface for pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout entire length of pipe. Carefully bed pipe in a soil foundation that has been accurately shaped and rounded to conform to lowest one-fourth of outside portion of circular piped, or lower curved position of pipe arch for entire length of pipe or arch. When necessary, tamp bedding firmly. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required for properly making particular type joint.

E. Existing utility lines that are shown on drawings, or locations of which are made known to Contractor prior to excavation, and that are to be retained, as well as utility lines constructed during excavation operation shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be repaired by Contractor at his expense. In event that Contractor damages any existing utility lines that are not shown on drawings or locations of which are not know to Contractor, report thereof shall be made immediately. If it is determined that repairs shall be made by Contractor, such repairs will be ordered under terms of "Changes in the Work" as set forth in the General Conditions.

F. After bedding has been prepared and pipe installed, selected material from excavation or burrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding six inches in compacted depth. Bring backfill up evenly on

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 9 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

both sides of pipe for its full length. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of fill under tampers and rammers. Continue this method of filling and compacting until fill has reached an elevation of at least 12 inches above top of pipe. Backfill and compact remainder of trench by spreading and rolling, or compact by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding eight inches.

G. In compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with pipe, displacement of or injury to pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over previously installed work at any stage on construction shall be at Contractor's risk. Any pipe damaged thereby shall be repaired or replaced at option of Engineer and expense of Contractor.

H. Wet down all fill and backfill work, and each layer thereof to obtain optimum moisture content. Compaction shall then be executed to density of 95 percent of that obtainable in laboratory by Procter Method, or by AASHO Method T99.

3.2 PIPE FITTINGS:

A. General: Provide complete systems of piping and fittings for all services as indicated. All pipe, valves, and fittings shall comply with American National Standards Institute, Inc. Code and/or local codes and ordinances. All fittings shall be domestically produced from domestic forgings. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at building or site, and work into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all windows, doors, and other openings or obstructions.

B. Excessive cutting or other weakening of building to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted. Test all piping prior to insulation or concealing.

3.3 PIPE:

A. All piping material shall be as specified in other sections of this division.

B. Fittings and Connections: All turns and connections shall be made with long radius fittings as scheduled hereinafter.

C. Pipe joints shall be made in accordance with the following applicable specifications:

D. Make all solder joints with non-corrosive type flux 95 Percent tin and 5 percent antimony alloy solder.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 10 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

E. Plastic Pipe: Joints for polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall be made using solvent cement. Threaded joints shall be used only where required for disconnection and inspection.

F. Make joints between earthenware fixtures and soil pipe by means of brass floor connections wiped to lead pipe. Joint shall be gas-tight and water-tight. Set all floor type water closets with a "no-seep" sleeve gasket. Caulk around perimeter of all floor mounted plumbing fixtures for leveling and prevention of water seepage.

3.4 SLEEVES:

A. Provide all sleeves in floors, beams, wall, roof, etc. as required for installing work of this division unless otherwise specified hereinafter. Size sleeves for insulated pipe to accommodate both pipe and insulation. Construct vertical sleeves in connection with concealed piping of 22 gauge galvanized iron. Sleeves thru fire-rated assemblies shall be firestopped as specified herein and insulation shall not pass thru sleeve unless material complies with firestopping specified.

3.5 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS:

A. Pipe hangers, supports and inserts shall comply with Table 308.5 of the 2015 International Plumbing Code and be provided as follows:

B. All piping shall be supported by forged steel hangers or brackets suitably fastened to structural portion. Wall brackets shall be Fee & Mason Fig. No. 151. Provide lock nuts on all adjustable hanger assemblies.

PIPE SIZE - INCHES

1/2 – 2 2-1/2 – 4 6 – Up Wall Plate Hanger

Grinnel 104 260 171 139 Fee & Mason 199 239 170 302 Elcen 92 12 15 ---

C. Hanger or Support Spacing (unless specified different hereinafter):

1. Copper Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Size – Inches Maximum Span - Feet

1-1/4" and under 6' 1-1/2" and above 10'

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 11 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. Plastic Pipe:

4'- 0" intervals

D. Size hangers on insulated piping to permit insulation and saddles to pass full size through hanger.

E. Bases of Stacks:

1. If not buried in earth, to be supported on concrete, brick in cement mortar, metal brackets permanently attached to the building structure, or by other approved methods.

F. Trapeze Hangers:

1. May be used for groups of pipes close together and parallel. Trapeze hangers may be constructed from structural channel or angle irons or from pre-formed channel shapes. All pipe lines must be held on specific centers by U bolts, clips or clamps.

G. Inserts:

1. For each hanger on horizontal pipes, installed before concrete is poured. Inserts shall permit horizontal adjustment of the nut.

H. Special and Additional Supports:

1. Special supports will be required where hangers cannot be used. Horizontal pipes shall be secured to prevent vibration or excessive sway. Where pipes must be laid on fill, they shall be supported at each joint by brick or concrete supports carried down into solid, natural earth. Where required, provide additional hangers to secure required level, slope or drainage, and also to prevent sagging. Provide a hanger within one foot of each elbow. Provide all miscellaneous steel required for pipe supports, anchors, etc.

3.6 INSULATION SHIELDS:

A. Provide all insulated piping with 10-inch long (16 gauge) protective galvanized sheet metal shields extending 120 degrees around bottom of insulated pipe at all hangers.

3.7 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES:

A. Where pipes pass through floors, finished walls, or ceilings, fit with chromium plate cast brass plates or chromium plated steel plates as specified hereinafter. Plates shall be large enough to completely close

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 12 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

hole around pipes, and shall be square, octagonal, or round, with least dimension not less than 1-1/2 times larger than diameter of pipe. Secure plates in an approved manner. Plates shall be Beaton-Caldwell No. 3A for floors and No. 40 for walls and ceilings.

3.8 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS:

A. Wherever any connection is made between dissimilar metals, provide dielectric pipe couplings or unions.

3.9 CLEANING:

A. All surfaces on metal, pipe, insulation covered surfaces, and other equipment furnished and installed under this division of the specifications shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, scale, dirt and other foreign material.

3.10 TESTING (PIPING):

A. Upon completion of each system of work under this division, and at a designated time, all piping shall be pressure tested for leaks in the presence of the owner. Owner shall be notified five days before testing is to be conducted and all tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner. All equipment required for test shall be furnished by contractor at his expense. All tests shall be performed as specified hereinafter. If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests repeated at no additional cost to owner. Make tight any leaks. Repeat tests until system is proven tight. Caulking of leaks will not be permitted. All equipment not capable of withstanding the test pressure shall be valved off during the test.

B. Drainage System: Drainage and venting system shall be tested in such a manner that cast iron soil pipe will not be subjected to excessive pressure. Testing of any portion of this system shall be executed by plugging all necessary openings of that portion of system being tested and filling with water to a height of not less than ten feet above highest floor, or a pump may be used to maintain an equivalent pressure. Test pressure shall be maintained to thirty minutes when using pump method. When using water column method, test period shall also be thirty minutes, and water level shall not drop. Hot poured joints shall not be tested with more than eighty feet head of water. No tests shall be made during freezing weather and all tests shall be made prior to backfilling.

C. Hot and Cold Water Piping: Upon completion of rough-in and before setting fixtures, entire hot and cold water systems shall be tested at a

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 13 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

hydrostatic pressure of 1-1/2 times operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig, and be proved tight at this pressure. Where a portion of water system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall be tested separately in a manner described for the entire system. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply.

D. Gas Piping: Gas piping shall be tested at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure, and be proved tight at this pressure. (Minimum test pressure 100 psig.)

3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

A. Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall compile and bind five (5) sets of all manufacturer's instructions and descriptive literature on all items of equipment furnished under this work. These instructions shall be delivered through the general contractor to the engineer for approval prior to final inspection.

1. Instructions shall include:

a) Warranty letter signed by the Mechanical Contractor. b) Index for each section with each section properly identified. c) Copy of sterilization report. d) Copy of one complete, approved submittal for each equipment section. e) Description of each system, including manufacturer's literature for all items. f) Suggested operating and maintenance instructions with frequency of maintenance indicated. g) Parts list for all items of equipment. h) Name, address, and telephone number of nearest sales and service organization for all items of equipment.

B. Manuals shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages bound in three ring expansion binders with a hard durable cover with clear plastic pocket on front for title page. Prepare binder covers with printed subject title of manual, title of project, date, and volume number when multiple binders are required. Printing shall be on face and spine. Provide a table of contents for each volume. Internally subdivide the binder contents with divider sheets with typed tab titles under reinforced plastic tabs. Provide directory listing as appropriate with names addresses, and telephone numbers of design consultant, Contractor, subcontractors, equipment suppliers, and nearest service representatives.

End of Section 220010

GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING 220010 - 14 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 220500 PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. General Requirements: This Section of the Specifications and related drawings describe requirements pertaining to plumbing work including applicable insulation in separate Section 220700. All work shall conform to Section 220010, General Provisions - Plumbing. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. All fixtures noted or specified.

2. Cold water and hot water systems.

3. Gas piping system.

4. Storm drainage system.

5. Soil, waste and vent piping system.

6. Other plumbing indicated on drawings, specified herein, or required for complete and proper installation in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.

7. Insulation.

B. Upon completion of work, all fixtures, devices, etc. for use by persons with disabilities shall meet all requirements as set forth by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING AND FITTINGS:

A. Materials shall conform to the following specifications requirements:

B. Construct all building sewers and building drain lines underground and/or under floor slabs to a point 5'-0" outside of building walls, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, with Schedule 40 PVC plastic solid pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665 or ASTM D-2949. Co-ex piping will not be allowed.

PLUMBING 220500 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Construct all soil, drain and waste piping, 2 inches and larger in diameter that is installed above floor slabs with Schedule 40 PVC plastic solid pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665 or ASTM D-2949. Co-ex piping will not be allowed.

D. Plumbing Contractor will connect up soil pipe at a point five feet outside the building.

E. Construct vent piping with Schedule 40 PVC plastic solid pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665 or ASTM D-2949. Co-ex piping will not be allowed.

2.2 SUPPLY PIPING AND FITTINGS:

A. Materials for supply piping and fittings shall conform to the following specification requirements:

B. All water main 3 inches and smaller buried in earth and/or below slabs shall be seamless hard drawn type K copper tubing, ASTM B 88, with wrought copper ASA B16.22 fittings, Class 150.

C. All water piping aboveground shall be seamless hard drawn type L copper tubing, ASTM B 88, with wrought copper ASA B16.22, fittings, Class No. 150.

D. Gas piping within structures, exterior to building, and above slabs shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with black malleable iron fittings. Exterior piping shall be primed and painted to protect piping from corrosive action.

E. Valves: Materials for valves shall conform to the following specification requirements:

1. Ball:

a) Ball valves 3” and smaller shall be two-piece bronze body, full port, chrome ball, RTFE seats, with adjustable packing, rated for 600 psig minimum working pressure, meeting WWV-35 and MSS-SP110.

2. Gas Valves:

a) Valves shall be semi-steel body, bolted cover type, screwed or flanged ends suitable for 175 pound, WOG.

PLUMBING 220500 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Hose Bibb: Interior hose bibbs shall be on angle pattern for 3/4- inch hose connection with rough nickel plate finish. Loose key type shall be provided where indicated.

G. Wall hydrants shall be Woodford Manufacturing Co., Jay R. Smith, Zurn Industries, or equal, Style 67.

2.3 CLEANOUTS:

A. Provide cleanouts as follows:

1. Unfinished areas and chases - Z-1450-7 C.I. cleanout ferrule with counter-sunk lead seal plug.

2. Finished walls - ZN-1440-4 C.I. wall cleanout ferrule with raised head lead seal plug and Nikaloy square scoriated frame and cover.

3. Finished linoleum, asphalt, or vinyl tile floor - ZN-1400-6 C.I. floor cleanout with seriated cut-off ferrule lead seal plug adjustable Nikaloy round scoriated frame and cover recessed for tile.

4. General use in Finished Floor - ZN-1400-4 C.I. floor cleanout with seriated cut-off ferrule lead seal plug adjustable Nikaloy square scoriated frame and cover.

5. All cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Zurn Industries, Inc., Jay R. Smith, Josam, or equal.

2.4 DRAINS:

A. Provide floor drains of manufacturer's standard size at locations indicated on drawings. Construct drains of cast iron with polished brass strainer. Floor drains shall be as indicated on drawings. Drains shall be as manufactured by Zurn Industries, Inc., Jay R. Smith, Josam, or equal.

2.5 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIM:

A. Fixtures and fixture trim shall be as called for on fixture schedule shown on drawings. All enamel on cast iron fixtures shall be acid resisting. Color of fixtures shall be white.

2.6 STORM DRAINAGE:

A. All pipes shall conform to sizes shown on drawings. All drain piping shall be similar to that shown previously for sanitary sewer piping.

PLUMBING 220500 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.7 SHOCK ABSORBERS:

A. Provide sealed air chambers of PDI size models as indicated and as manufactured by Sioux Chief Model Hydrarester, or equal by Jay R. Smith, Zurn, or Josam. All shock absorbers shall bear PDI seal of approval and tested and certified in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute “Standard P.D.I. WH-201” and shall not require access.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS:

A. Verify locations and inverts of existing and proposed pipes, location of structural elements, locations and sizes of chases, type and method of construction of floors, walls, partitions, etc.

B. Drawings do not indicate all offsets, fittings, and specialties. Examine other drawings, investigate conditions to be encountered and arrange work accordingly, furnishing required fittings, valves, specialties, etc. without extra charge. Where conditions necessitate rearrangement, submit for approval sketches showing proposed arrangement.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. GENERAL:

1. Protect pipe openings and drains by plugs or caps. Duct tape will not be acceptable. Clean all stoppages.

2. Unless otherwise shown, install piping concealed, straight, without sags or pockets and graded for drainage. Cut pipe ends square and ream. Before assembly, clean dirt, scale and chips.

3. Provide clearance between pipe and building structure so pipes can expand without damage to building structure.

4. Schedule meetings with other trades before and during installation to avoid conflicts and ensure that pipes and equipment are installed in best manner, taking into consideration headroom, maintenance, appearance and replacement.

PLUMBING 220500 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.3 PAINTING:

A. Clean damaged factory finishes and coat with matching touch-up paint. Paint all supports and hangers with two coats of high heat aluminum paint.

3.4 SOIL, WASTE, SEWER AND VENT PIPING:

A. Install sewer and water pipes in separate trenches with grades uniform to provide solid bearing. Dig bell holes at hubs. Piping through or under footings shall be provided with a pipe sleeve or relieving arch.

B. Run horizontal pipe, graded uniformly, not less than 1/4" per foot for pipes 2-1/2" and smaller; and 1/8" per foot for larger pipes. Offset as required to pass obstacles.

C. Change size by reducing fittings. Change directions by 45-degree wyes and long-sweep bends. Use short-sweep bends only with written approval. No pipe shall be drilled, tapped, or welded. Saddle hubs and bands, tapped tees, and crosses will not be approved.

D. Upon completion of tests and inspections, backfill with approved material, placed and tamped to prevent settlement.

3.5 HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING:

A. Unless otherwise indicated, run hot and cold water piping concealed, and uniformly pitched to ensure venting and drainage. Install drain valves at low points.

B. Unless otherwise required, branches to small fixtures shall be 1/2" ID for single fixture and 3/4" ID for two fixtures. Pipe size indications are "nominal" sizes.

3.6 GAS PIPING:

A. Gas piping shall be installed and connected to all gas-fired appliances with an individual regulating and shut-off valve at each appliance. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the rules and recommendations of the following:

1. International Fuel Gas Code – 2015 Edition

3.7 SHOCK ABSORBERS:

A. All shock absorbers shall bear PDI seal of approval. Locate shock absorbers as indicated on plans. Install in an upright position

PLUMBING 220500 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.8 TRAPS:

A. Provide each fixture with a trap when connection to drainage system is required. Place each trap as near to fixture as possible. No fixture shall be double trapped.

3.9 FLASHING:

A. Vent pipes and stack vents shall be flashed and made watertight at roof with 16 ounce, soft, sheet copper or 4-pound sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than 8 inches from pipe in all directions. Flashing for pipe shall be extended up the pipe a minimum of 6 inches, at which point threaded standard cast iron or malleable iron recess roof coupling shall be installed to form counterflashing or rain guard.

3.10 CLEANOUTS:

A. Provide an easily accessible cleanout at foot of each vertical soil or waste stack and where indicated on drawings. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as pipe in which they are installed, up to 4 inches; and not less than 4 inches for larger sizes. A cleanout shall consist of a long sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends. Maximum spacing of cleanouts shall be one hundred feet.

3.11 DRAINS:

A. Provide floor drains of manufacturer's standard size at locations indicated on drawings. Carefully set drains to grade to provide drainage of surrounding area, and trap.

3.12 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIM:

A. Provide lavatories with angle stops. Provide all other plumbing fixtures with either angle or straight stops, integral with faucets, or with concealed type lock shield or loose-key pattern.

B. All fixtures and trimmings shall be designed to prevent backflow of polluted water or waste into water supply system.

C. Except where noted otherwise, exposed piping fittings and trimmings shall be chromium plated over nickel-plated brass with polished, bright surfaces.

D. Securely support fixtures with approved brackets, chairs, bolts, and metal expansion inserts. Where chases are provided or adjacent space

PLUMBING 220500 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

in an undeveloped area, use through-bolts and heavy steel load distributing plate in addition to other means specified.

3.13 STERILIZATION:

A. All water piping installed under this section shall be thoroughly sterilized. The entire sterilization procedure shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the State Board of Health and, upon completion of the sterilization; the potability of the water in the system shall be checked and approved by the Engineer. All costs for testing shall be paid for by this Contractor.

End of Section 220500

PLUMBING 220500 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. General Requirements: This section shall include all insulation as required for installation on all items as specified hereinafter and/or as indicated. All insulations shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by qualified workers in the employment of an independent insulation contractor. Costs of insulation shall be included as part of work by contractor as applicable to his section of work. No separate bid is to be included for insulation work.

B. Fire hazard classification for all material shall not exceed flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 as classified by Underwriters Laboratories under Test Method ASTM E-84 and acceptable under NFPA Standards. This is to apply to the complete system and be a composite rating of insulation material with jacket or facings, vapor barrier, joint sealing tapes, mastic and fittings.

C. Prior to commencing any work, submit data sheets for engineer's approval of all material proposed to be used on this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ABOVE GROUND INDOOR PIPING:

A. Pipe Insulation:

1. All water piping shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass with all-service jacket Owens-Corning Double Self-Sealing Lap, ASJ/SSL-II, one piece, to be used on all lines above and below ambient temperature from 0oF to 850oF.

2.2 PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS:

A. Piping for the following systems shall be insulated to the thickness listed:

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

Item Insulation Thickness (Inches)

Fiberglass K = .24

Cold Pipes:

Cold Water (Domestic) 1"

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSULATION:

A. All insulation shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces butting all sections firmly together and finishing as specified hereinafter.

B. All vapor barriers shall be sealed, and shall be continuous throughout. No staples shall be used on any vapor barrier jacket unless sealed with vapor barrier coating or vapor barrier tape.

C. Insulation of all insulated lines shall be interpreted as including all pipe, valves, fittings and specialties comprising the lines.

D. Pipe Insulation Protection: Direct contact between pipe and hangers shall be avoided. Hanger shall pass outside of a sheet metal protection saddle which shall cover a section of high density insulation (cellular glass or calcium silicate), of sufficient length to support the weight of the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapor barrier shall be continuous behind the saddle or shall be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented thereto.

E. All pipe covering shall be furnished with self-seal lap and 3" wide butt joint strips. The release paper is pulled from adhesive edge, pipe covering closed tightly around pipe and self-seal lap rubbed hard in place with the blunt edge of an insulation knife. This procedure applied to longitudinal as well as circumferential joints. Staple all longitudinal and circumferential joints with 9/16" staples 6" on center and seal over all staples with Childers CP-30 vapor barrier coating. Care shall be taken to keep jacket clean as it is the finish on all exposed work. All adjoining insulation sections shall be firmly butted together before butt joint strip is applied, and all chilled water and cold water service lines shall have vapor barrier coating thoroughly coated to pipe at butt joints and at all fittings.

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Apply fiberglass inserts to all other hot fittings and cold water fittings in conjunction with Proto PVC Fitting Covers. Seal cold applications as recommended by the manufacturer.

End of Section 220700

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 230010 GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE:

A. Bids of work covered by each section of these specifications shall be based on the layout and equipment as shown and specified with only such approved substitutions as are allowed. Drawings show general arrangement of ductwork and piping. Because of small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories, which may be required. Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Where locations make it necessary or desirable from Contractor's standpoint to make changes in arrangements or details shown on drawings, he may present suggestions for such changes and obtain Engineer's approval prior to making such changes.

1.2 CODES:

A. All work under this division shall be in strict compliance with "International Codes" and all applicable Codes and Regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.3 MATERIAL AND SHOP DRAWINGS:

B. Schedule submittals to expedite work. Unless otherwise indicated in this Section, submittals shall be submitted within 30 days of date of Notice to Proceed. Provide electronic copies of submittals in PDF format for review and approval. All submittals shall be bound in a single volume. Partial lists will not be considered and will be returned to the Contractor. Controls may be submitted separately and shall be submitted no later than 60 days of notice to proceed. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, pertinent drawing sheet and detail numbers, and associated specification section numbers. A table of contents shall be included in the front of the submittal with tabs

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

indicating each section. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Contractor responsibilities:

2. Where required by specifications or otherwise needed, prepare drawings illustrating portion of work for use in fabricating, interfacing with other work, and installing products. Prepare ¼” per foot scale drawings of all mechanical rooms when substituting items of equipment that are not the basis for design. All equipment submitted shall be of adequate size and physical arrangement to allow unobstructed access when installed, for routine maintenance, coil removal, shaft removal, motor removal and other similar operations. Contract Drawings shall not be reproduced and submitted as shop drawings. Drawings shall be 8-1/2 by 11 inches minimum and 24 by 36 inches maximum. Title each drawing with Project name and reference the sheet the drawing corresponds to.

3. Provide product data such as manufacturer's brochures, catalog pages, illustrations, diagrams, tables, performance charts, and other material which describe appearance, size, attributes, code and standard compliance, ratings, and other product characteristics. Provide all critical information such as reference standards, performance characteristics, capacities, power requirements, wiring and piping diagrams, controls, component parts, finishes, dimensions, and required clearances. Submit only data which are pertinent. Mark each copy of manufacturer's standard printed data to identify products, models, options, and other data pertinent to project.

4. Control diagrams: Show relative positions of each component as a system diagram. Provide points list, wiring diagram and schedule of all products and components used in system.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

5. Engineer will review and return submittals with comments. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Engineer acceptance. Promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. Revise and resubmit submittals as required within 15 days of return from Engineer. Make re-submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.

D. Engineer Review:

E. Samples:

1. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products with all integral parts and attachment devices. Include full range of manufacturer's standard finishes, indicating colors, textures, and patterns for A/E selection. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections. One sample will be retained by A/E.

F. Items Requiring Submittal are as Follows:

1. Test and Balance

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. Insulation 3. All items listed in MANUFACTURERS: Section of 230010

1.4 ASBESTOS:

A. At any time the Contractor encounters asbestos, he shall immediately stop work in the immediate area and suspend any further work until asbestos is removed. Contractor shall, upon discovery of asbestos, notify owner, or owner's representative, who shall be responsible for the removal of the asbestos, all in accordance with NESHAP (National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants). Any form of asbestos removal or demolition shall be by owner. Engineer is not an "Owner or Operator" as defined under NESHAP.

B. Contractor is responsible for, and shall be aware of all state and federal laws pertaining to asbestos as well as NESHAP requirements.

1.5 LEAD FREE:

A. All solder, flux and pipe used in water system must be lead free. Lead free is defined as less than 0.2 percent lead in solder and flux and less than 8.0 percent lead in pipes and fittings.

1.6 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT:

A. All items or work under this division of the specifications shall comply with guidelines as set forth in the Americans With Disabilities Act.

1.7 PERMITS AND FEES:

1.8 DEFINITIONS:

A. In this division of the specifications and accompanying drawings, the following definitions apply:

C. Install (Installed): To furnish and install complete and ready for operation.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Furnish: To purchase, pay for, and deliver to the job site for installation by others.

E. The Mechanical Contractor is cautioned that "furnish" requires coordination with others. Such coordination costs shall be included as part of Mechanical Contractor's bid.

1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Cutting of walls, floors, roofs, partitions, and ceiling, required for proper installation of the systems shall be performed under this contract.

D. Patching shall be performed to match existing structures, exterior walls and roofs, and shall form watertight installation. Where existing ductwork, pipe or other items are removed, the walls, floors, roofs, partitions or ceilings shall be patched to match existing finishes by this contractor.

1.10 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS, ETC.:

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES:

A. Coordinate all work of each section with work of other sections to avoid interference. Bidders are cautioned to check their equipment against space available as indicated on drawings, and shall make sure that proposed equipment can be accommodated. Before beginning work under each section, inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where the installation may properly begin.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Where equipment supplied by an approved manufacturer is substituted for the specified equipment, the Contractor will be responsible for coordinating any changes required in his work or other trades work, including but not limited to electrical requirements, structural steel requirements and space requirements. Any additional costs required to make changes to other trades work shall be borne by this contractor.

1.12 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK:

1.13 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

A. All items of equipment removed under this section of the specifications shall become the property of this Contractor shall be promptly removed from this site.

1.14 CLEAN-UP:

A. At the completion of the contract work, all areas where work has been performed shall be left clean. All trash shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.

1.15 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS:

B. Requests for written approval to substitute materials or equipment considered by the Contractor as equal to those specified, shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. Requests shall be accompanied by samples, descriptive literature and engineering information as necessary to fully identify and evaluate the product. No increase in the contract sum will be considered when requests are not approved.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. The Contractor shall bear the burden and cost of coordinating with all trades any changes in work required by substitutions, including but not limited to electrical connections, additional components required, service clearance, etc.

1.16 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

1.17 WARRANTY:

A. The Contractor for each section of the work under this division will furnish to the Owner a written warranty for the installation as installed, including controls and all other equipment covered under each section of the specifications, to perform in a quiet, efficient, and satisfactory manner with no more than normal service.

B. Each warranty shall extend for a period of one year following substantial completion and acceptance of construction. They shall be endorsed by the Contractor. Refrigeration compressors shall have a five (5) year warranty.

1.18 MANUFACTURERS:

B. In addition to products of manufacturers named hereinafter in the specifications, equivalent products of the following named manufacturers will be acceptable under the base bid:

1. Ductless Split Heat Pumps:

a) Mitsubishi, Daikin, LG, Panasonic

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. Gas Fired Infra-Red Unit Heaters:

a) Space Ray, Perfection Schwank, Reznor, Reflect-O- Ray/CRC, Modine Air Systems, Roberts-Gordon

3. Fans:

a) Greenheck Fan Corporation, Loren Cook Company, Breidert/Jenn Fans, Carnes Company, ACME, PennBarry, Twin City Blower, American Coolair/ILG

4. HVLS Fans:

a) Greenheck Fan Corporation, Big Ass Fan, MacroAir

5. Louvers:

a) Ruskin Manufacturing Company, Greenheck, NCA Manufacturing, Safe Air/Dowco, Inc., Cesco Products, Inc., Leader Industries, Pottorff, Arrow United, Nailor

6. Identification Items:

a) Seton Name Plate Company, W.H. Brady Company, Handley Industries, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTING:

A. Furnish touch up paint supplied by equipment manufacturer.

B. Coat ferrous metal surfaces that do not have factory painting or galvanizing with one coat of Sherwin Williams high heat aluminum paint.

2.2 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS:

A. Use 3000-psi "batch plant" concrete or approved "precast" reinforced concrete foundations.

2.3 NAME PLATES:

A. All equipment provided under this division shall be labeled with a Bakelite nameplate 1" x 3" minimum with 3/8" minimum height lettering as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company. See filter nameplate requirement below.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 8 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS:

A. Consult ASHRAE: A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint, Chapter 6 for specific reinforcement and anchoring details, with respect to pad size and seismic forces. Unless otherwise noted, set all floor mounted and "on-grade" mounted equipment on 6" high concrete foundation pads. Concrete foundations shall be reinforced with #4 bars - 12" o.c. both ways, or as directed by A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint. Pads shall be approximately 6" larger than equipment base, and have 1" x 1" chamfer on all edges. Pads shall have carborundum brick rubbed finish. Surface finish shall be uniformly smooth. Concrete floor shall be rough and foundation doweled to floor per A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint.

3.2 PIPE FITTINGS:

B. Excessive cutting or other weakening of building to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted. Test all piping prior to insulation or concealing.

3.3 PIPE:

A. All piping material shall be as specified in other sections of this division.

B. Fittings and Connections: All turns and connections shall be made with long radius fittings as scheduled hereinafter. No miter connections will be permitted in welded work.

C. Pipe joints shall be made in accordance with the following applicable specifications:

1. Make all solder joints with non-corrosive type flux 95 Percent tin and 5 percent antimony alloy solder.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 9 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Threaded Pipe: Threaded joints shall have American Nation taper screw threads with graphite and oil compound applied to male thread.

3.4 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS:

A. Pipe hangers, supports and inserts shall comply with Table 305.4 of the 2015 International Mechanical Code and be provided as follows:

B. Hanger or Support Spacing (unless specified different hereinafter):

1. Copper Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Size – Inches Maximum Span - Feet

1-1/4" and under 6' and at each change in direction 1-1/2" and above 10' and at each change in direction

C. Trapeze Hangers:

2. When supported with uni-strut an insulation sleeve under the clamp equal to Armacell Armafix is required.

D. Special and Additional Supports:

1. Special supports will be required where hangers cannot be used. Horizontal pipes shall be secured to prevent vibration or excessive sway. Where required, provide additional hangers to secure required level, slope or drainage, and also to prevent sagging. Provide a hanger within one foot of each elbow. Provide all miscellaneous steel required for pipe supports, anchors, etc.

2. Pipe supports located on the exterior of the building on grade or on the roof shall be steel with a hot dip galvanized coating.

3.5 INSULATION SHIELDS:

A. Provide all insulated piping with 10-inch long (16 gauge) protective galvanized sheet metal shields extending 120 degrees around bottom of insulated pipe.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 10 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.6 ELECTRIC WORK:

A. All motors, and motor starters shall be furnished for items installed under this division of the specifications. All starters shall be magnetic type. All electrically operated equipment shall have readily accessible nameplates summarizing electrical information (i.e., voltage, phase, horsepower, watts, or amperes). Starters shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Westinghouse Electric Company, Cutler- Hammer Inc., or Square D Company. A.C. magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type. Starters shall provide overload protection in each phase and shall otherwise conform to all applicable requirements of these specifications. All magnetic starters shall be combination type, Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) type having interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit current, with "HAND-OFF-AUTO" selector switch, auxiliary contact, and pilot light in cover. Provide laminated plastic nameplates with white center core for each starter.

B. All control conduit and wires and control devices shall be furnished and installed under this division. All contactors shall be of the mechanically held type. All control wiring within starters shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and neatly laced. All control wiring shall be color coded.

C. All work shall conform with the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Codes. All electrical power characteristics shall be as indicated. All devices, which make and/or break electrical circuits, shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the load.

D. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 volts. Control power shall be taken from line terminals of controllers. Where necessary, control transformers shall be provided and shall conform to NEMA Standards, properly sized, and shall be properly fused. Where control voltage is 120 volts, control conductors shall be color-coded.

E. Electrical power service and connections to all equipment in this division will be made under electrical division of the work.

3.7 ITEMS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:

A. All items of mechanical equipment electrically operated shall be in complete accordance with paragraph in this division entitled "Electrical Work". Mechanical equipment, other than individually mounted motors, shall be factory pre-wired to a single-set of line terminals and to a single load terminal strip to match load terminals on equipment. Each step shall have properly sized contactor and overcurrent protection.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 11 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Mechanical equipment electrical components shall all be bonded together and connected to electrical system ground.

3.8 CLEANING:

B. Upon complete installation of ducts, clean entire system of rubbish, plaster, dirt, etc., before installing any outlets. After installation of outlets and connections to fans are made, blow out entire system with all control devices wide open.

3.9 SYSTEM BALANCING:

A. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for the entire Test & Balance process. The contractor shall employ an independent balancing firm specializing in total system air balancing as approved by the engineer and certified by the AABC or NEBB. The balancing firm shall be employed prior to installation of any ductwork. Provide all labor, engineering and test equipment required to test, adjust, and balance all ventilating, air conditioning, and exhaust systems.

B. The Contractor is responsible to have a functioning system prior to Testing and Balancing, to provide a joint and cooperative effort to coordinate the test and balance, and to solve any problems in balancing and controls in order to establish proper system performance before leaving the job. The Contractor is responsible for providing the Test and Balance Agency (TAB) with a complete set of project drawings, specifications, and submittals, and for providing and installing new sheave or sheaves, new belts, as required, if a change in fan speed is necessary which cannot be made by adjusting the sheave originally installed. When requested by the Engineer, the TAB Agency will review plans and specifications of the systems prior to installation and submit a report of any deficiencies, which could preclude proper adjusting, balancing and testing of the system. The TAB agency shall submit copies of deficiency reports along with a preliminary report to the Engineer for review prior to final submittal.

C. Instruments used will be those that meet the instrument requirements for Agency Qualifications of the AABC as published in the NEBB “Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems” or the AABC "National Standards for Total System Balance".

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 12 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Fan air volume shall be adjusted to within 5% of design, and diffuser air volumes to within 10% of design.

E. Reporting (Submit five copies of final Test Report)

1. Complete nameplate data and equipment schedule number for all rotating equipment. 2. Design and actual operating data for all rotating equipment including inlet and outlet data, flow rates, amps, voltage and rpm. 3. Design and actual exahaust fan volumes. 4. Heating equipment nameplate data, equipment schedule number design data, and operating data at maximum achievable load conditions.

3.10 TESTING (PIPING):

B. All refrigerant piping and apparatus shall be tested with dry carbon dioxide or nitrogen plus a small amount of refrigerant. All refrigerating equipment shall be tested under vacuum and shall show no evidence of leakage with an absolute pressure of .20 inch mercury gauge, sustained for a period of one hour without pumping. Leaks shall be corrected by remaking the joint. Test pressures shall be as follows:

High Side Low Side

Refrigerant 410A - 400 psi Refrigerant 410A - 350 psi

C. Install a card conspicuously and as near as practicable to the refrigerant condensing unit giving instructions for the operation of the system, including precautions to be observed in case of a breakdown or leak.

D. Each refrigerating system shall be provided with an easily legible metal sign permanently attached and easily accessible, indicating thereon the name and address of the manufacturer or installer, the kind and total

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 13 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

number of pounds of refrigerant contained in the system and the field test pressure applied.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT IN MECHANICAL AREAS:

A. All items of mechanical equipment shall be identified with a black bakelite label with engraved white lettering 1/2” tall. Labels shall be mechanically attached to the equipment with rivets or stainless steel screws. Thermostats and control devices shall be identified with a black bakelite label with engraved white lettering 1/4” tall. Lettering shall correspond with the tags shown in the drawings.

3.12 ADJUSTMENT AND TRIAL RUNS:

A. Upon completion of all work, the contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the owner for the purpose of demonstrating quiet and satisfactory operation, the proper setting of controls, safety and relief valves, and cleanliness of system. Heating and cooling shall be tested separately during periods approaching design conditions and shall fully demonstrate fulfillment of capacity requirements. Test procedures shall be in accordance with applicable portions of ASME, ASHRAE, and other generally recognized test codes as far as field conditions will permit. Any changes or adjustment required shall be made by the contractor without additional expense to owner.

B. Document and submit all operating conditions (startup report) of equipment during trial runs and after test and balance is complete. Include in the report:

1. Ambient air temperature 2. Design operating temperatures and flow rates 3. Entering and leaving air temperatures across each coil or heating device 4. Amp draw of all motors and nameplate amps 5. Voltage at each piece of equipment 6. Refrigerant pressures and temperatures

C. All equipment shall be started and tested for proper operation per the manufacturer’s recommended startup procedure. The following items shall be verified and documented in the startup reports.

1. Verify equipment is in accordance with equipment submittal (confirm al components are installed and provided as indicated) 2. Verify unit nameplate voltage with voltage available at jobsite 3. Verify all electrical connections are tight

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 14 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

4. Verify control wiring as required (refer to Controls section of manufacturer’s IOM & jobsite specific requirements in accordance with equipment submittal) 5. Verify disconnect and fuses are sized in accordance to unit data plate 6. Verify heater piping or electrical supply in accordance with manufacturer’s IOM 7. Verify Gas Heating installed in accordance with manufacturer’s IOM 8. Verify drain piping is installed accordance with manufacturer’s IOM 9. Verify Economizer operation and proper installation 10. Verify sensors shipped with Economizer as described in installation literature are properly installed and functioning correctly 11. Check supply and exhaust fan belts for proper tension, as applicable and in accordance with manufacturer’s IOM 12. Verify proper unit control setup and function (I.e configure features such as single zone VAV and multizone VAV as required by the IOM) 13. Verify unit sequence of operations function in accordance with manufacturer’s IOM (heating sequence & cooling sequence) 14. Verify unit clearances are in compliance with manufacturer’s IOM

D. Provide a factory startup as indicated in the equipment schedules. Factory startup shall be performed by technicians that are factory trained and certified, and in the employ of the manufacturer’s rep.

3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

A. Upon completion of work, and at a time designated by the engineer, a competent employee of the contractor shall be provided to instruct a representative of the owner in the operation and maintenance of the system.

B. Minimum instruction period shall be:

1. Air Conditioning System - 1/2 day

C. Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall compile and bind five (5) sets of all manufacturer's instructions and descriptive literature on all items of equipment furnished under this work. These instructions shall be delivered through the general contractor to the engineer for approval prior to final inspection.

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 15 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Instructions shall include:

1. Warranty letter signed by the Mechanical Contractor. 2. Index for each section with each section properly identified. 3. Complete equipment list with model and serial numbers. 4. Complete equipment list with filter sizes and quantities. 5. Copy of one complete, approved submittal for each equipment section. 6. Description of each system, including manufacturer's literature for all items. 7. Start-up and shut-down description for each system. 8. Suggested operating and maintenance instructions with frequency of maintenance indicated. 9. Parts list for all items of equipment. 10. Name, address, and telephone number of nearest sales and service organization for all items of equipment. 11. Startup reports. 12. Test and Balance Reports

E. Manuals shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages in digital PDF format. Prepare binder covers with printed subject title of manual, title of project, date, and volume number when multiple binders are required. Provide a table of contents for each volume. Internally subdivide the binder contents with bookmarks providing a link to each section. Provide directory listing as appropriate with names addresses, and telephone numbers of design consultant, Contractor, subcontractors, equipment suppliers, and nearest service representatives.

End of Section 230010

GENERAL PROVISIONS - HVAC 230010 - 16 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 230500 HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements:

A. This Section of the Specifications and related drawings describe requirements pertaining to Air Conditioning, Heating and Ventilation work, including applicable HVAC Insulation in separate Section 230700. All work shall comply with Section 230010 - General Provisions - HVAC.

B. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 2005 Edition. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS:

A. Ductwork shop drawings must be submitted for approval by Engineer. Any ductwork installed without prior approval by the Engineer shall be replaced at the expense of the contractor.

2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. The contractor must comply with this specification in its entirety. At the discretion of the Engineer, sheet metal gauges, and reinforcing may be checked at various times to verify all duct construction is in compliance.

2.3 DUCTS, PLENUM, ETC.:

A. As indicated on drawings, provide a system of metal ducts for supply, return and exhaust air.

B. All sheet metal, ducts, casing, plenums, etc., of sizes indicated, shall be constructed from prime galvanized sheet steel.

2.4 DUCTS THRU WALLS:

A. Provide sheet metal flashing around all duct penetrations.

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.5 METAL DUCTWALL:

A. All ducts shall be constructed of G-90 or better galvanized steel (ASTM A653) LFQ, chem treat. Galvanized metal ducts shall be a minimum thickness of 24 gage.

B. Support, access doors not part of ducts, bar or angle reinforcing damper rods and items made of uncoated mild steel shall be painted with two coats of primer or provide galvanized equivalent.

C. Low Pressure Supply, Return, and Exhaust Duct:

1. Ductwork on low pressure supply and return systems and restroom exhaust duct shall be fabricated to meet minimum 2” w.g. pressure class in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard.

2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT LONGITUDINAL SEAMS:

A. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Button punch snap lock is not acceptable.

2.7 ROUND DUCT LONGITUDINAL SEAMS:

A. Spiral seam or snap lock seam shall be used on all longitudinal seams for low pressure round duct.

2.8 DUCT JOINTS:

A. Duct joints to meet criteria as defined in SMACNA's 2005 Manual, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

B. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted as an alternative to SMACNA duct construction standards. Duct constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements.

C. Ductmate 440 or a Butyl Rubber Gasket which meets Mil-C 18969B, Type II Class B, TT-C-1796A, Type II Class B, and TTS-S-001657 must also pass UL-723. This material, in addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth associated with dark, damp areas of ductwork. The recommended test procedure for bacterial and fungal growth is found in 21CFR 177, 1210 closures with sealing gaskets for food containers.

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.9 SEALERS:

A. Duct sealer shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall seal out water, air, and moisture. Sealer shall be UL listed and conform to NFPA 90A & 90B. Sealer shall be Childers CP-145A, or equal.

B. Ducts routed exposed shall have no visible duct sealer.

2.10 DUCTWORK HANGER/SUPPORT:

A. Hang and support ductwork as defined by SMACNA, Chapter 5 2005 Manual, First Edition, or as defined within. Hanger spacing for sheet metal duct not to exceed 8'. Hanger spacing for flexible duct shall not exceed 5’.

B. Duct supports on the exterior of the building on grade or on the roof shall be steel with a hot dip galvanized coating.

2.11 TURNING VANES:

A. Turning vanes shall be double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Tab spacing shall be SMACNA Standard. Rail systems with non-standard tab spacings shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs which align the vanes automatically. Vanes shall be subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs. when fastened per the manufacturers instructions.

2.12 APPARATUS CONNECTIONS:

A. Flexible connections: For low velocity ductwork (less than 2,400 FPM), provide flexible connections at inlet and outlet of each fan connected to ductwork and elsewhere as indicated. Flexible connections shall be 6 inches wide, waterproof and fireproof, and shall be equal to “Hardcast Connector Plus Neoprene” flexible connectors. Provide at least one inch slack.

2.13 PIPE AND FITTINGS:

A. Schedule of pipe and fittings: Piping and fittings shall conform to requirements as indicated herein.

B. All pipe shall be domestically produced from domestic forgings.

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.14 SCHEDULE OF PIPING

SERVICE ITEM PIPING FITTINGS FLANGES OR UNIONS

Unitary 2” and Type L, Solder type Wrought Condensate smaller Hard drawn wrought solder copper Drain copper copper to copper

2.15 REFRIGERANT PIPING:

A. General: Execute all refrigerant piping with stamped type "ACR" hard copper and long radius, wrought copper, sweat fittings with tolerance not to exceed 3/1000 of an inch. All joints shall be made with silver solder. Submit equipment manufacturer's suggested piping diagram for approval.

B. After refrigerant piping has been installed and tested, each system shall be evacuated and charged with proper refrigerant of quantity as recommended by manufacturer.

2.16 VENTILATING FANS:

A. See Schedule for characteristics and accessories. Units shall be AMCA or PFMA certified. Use shaded pole, single phase motors under 1/4 HP and split capacitor or polyphase motors 1/4 HP and larger.

B. Fans shall be complete with all accessories required for installation including integral overload protection or motor starter.

2.17 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:

A. Provide complete system of air conditioning units and accessories as scheduled on the drawings. All units shall carry a five (5) year compressor warranty.

2.18 GAS FIRED INFRA-RED TUBE HEATERS:

A. Provide Space-Ray LTU series tube heater(s) or approved equal (see Section 230010) of the type, arrangement, size, and indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity of 97.5% and designed for U-tube heaters. The tube body and u-bend shall be totally enclosed with a single reflector to maximize emitter temperature and radiant heat exchange between

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

the firing and exhaust legs. In addition, the reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant heat output and minimum convection losses. The single reflector design shall cover the firing and exhaust legs as well as the entire u-bend. U-tube configuration made of straight tubes with individual reflectors covering the firing and exhaust legs shall not be accepted.

C. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 750ºF-900ºF and shall be made of 16- gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm steel for long life (3" O.D. for LTU40-75 and 4" O.D. for LTU80-250). The emitter tubes shall be calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, and high radiant efficiency for use in high humidity and harsh environment installations (waste water treatment plants, outdoor covered patios and restaurants, golf driving ranges, dairy barns etc.) The measured surface emissivity shall be 0.80-0.82 at operating temperature. The calorization process shall produce an emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive on the interior (0.95) and highly radiant emissive (0.80-0.82) on the exterior. Heaters that utilize hot rolled emitter tubes will not be accepted. The system shall have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 65%.

D. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate under negative pressure (pull through system) at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases inside the building. Heaters that operate under positive pressure (push through system) will not be accepted. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed, shielded, fan cooled and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or lubrication for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90º for vertical or horizontal venting.

E. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 100% shutoff system. Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls shall include a pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of combustion air or flue blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring light system. The three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow, the spark ignition and the combination gas valve operation.

F. The heaters shall be factory assembled and tested. The only field assembly required is connecting the control/exhauster assembly to the factory assembled body section. This will minimize field assembly to 15 minutes per heater, which will minimize installation cost. The heaters

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

shall not require any field wiring or adjustments to assure maximum performance and safety.

G. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame characteristics shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter tube wall. The manufacturer shall include a 36” long, 5/8” OD heavy-duty stainless steel (powder painted in yellow color) flexible gas connector as part of the heater.

H. The heaters shall be CSA design certified for vertical or horizontal venting, maximum 75 feet horizontal sidewall venting and for 50 feet outside combustion inlet duct. There shall be no draft hoods. The combustion chamber shall be totally enclosed.

I. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from horizontal and shall be suitable for direct venting/indirect venting applications. Heaters shall be designed to operate on natural or propane gas.

J. Heaters shall be design certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) to American National Standard Z83.20/CSA2.34. The manufacturer shall provide a written limited warranty covering the heavy one-piece cast iron burner for a period of ten (10) years, the emitter tube for a period of five (5) years, and all components utilized in the heater's control assembly for a period of one (1) year.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCTWORK, GENERAL:

A. Drawings show general arrangement of duct. Provide all ductwork required to complete installation and avoid interferences. Installation shall conform with applicable portions of Section 230010, General Provisions, HVAC. Fabricate ducts as job progresses, using actual job measurements and referring to architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing and equipment drawings in order to avoid conflicts. Where space limitations preclude use of ducts and fittings as shown, consult Engineer for instructions. All ductwork, offsets, fittings, etc. required to make a complete and efficiently operating installation are included in this contract and shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards for the application unless noted otherwise herein.

B. All duct dimensions shown on drawings are "inside clear". The sizes of acoustically lined ducts and dampers in ducts shall be increased accordingly. Ducts shall be smooth on inside.

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Provide flexible duct connectors at all ductwork connections to equipment with fans, motors or rotating components.

D. Install double thickness turning vanes in duct fittings having centerline radius less than 1-1/2 times width of duct.

E. Support ducts from building structure with 1 inch wide galvanized steel bands per SMACNA recommendations. Wire hangers and nylon straps will not be acceptable.

F. Seal all joints in supply, return and exhaust ducts with Childers CP-145 Veloseal, or McGill Airseal, DuroDyne or equal water based synthetic duct sealant, or equal.

G. Upon complete installation of ducts, clean entire system of rubbish, plaster, dirt, etc. before installing any outlets. After installation of outlets and connections to fans are made, blow out entire system with all control devices wide open.

3.2 PIPING, GENERAL:

A. All piping shall conform with Section 230010 - General Provisions - HVAC.

B. Pipe and equipment locations shown are approximate. Exact location of equipment, pipes, and chases to be as approved and determined in field to avoid other pipes and maintain structural clearances. Use actual job dimensions and equipment shop drawings for roughing.

C. Piping to comply with best trade practice. Provide clearance between pipe and building structure so pipes can expand without damage to building structure.

D. When soldering refrigerant pipe joints, a dry nitrogen purge shall be required through the inside of the pipe to prevent oxidation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT, GENERAL:

A. All equipment specified herein shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions and these specifications. All items shall have adequate clearances for access and maintenance. Each item of equipment shall be performance tested to verify compliance with specifications. Certified data sheets of successful performance tests shall be included in operating manuals.

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL:

A. General: Provide a complete system of temperature controls as described herein. The system shall be installed complete by competent mechanics in the employment of the control manufacturer. All control wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit with control and power wiring in separate conduits.

B. Wiring for low voltage circuits (24 volts or less) may be No. 16 up to 50 feet, and above 50 feet shall be of size to limit voltage drop to 5 percent. Interlock wiring shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturer.

C. Provide automatic changeover 7 day programmable thermostat per the equipment schedule.

3.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals as required in Section 230010. At completion of work, submit check-out report of automatic control system. Submit start up reports per Section 230010. Submit test and balance report per 230010. Submit manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions.

End of Section 230500

HEATING, VENTILATION and AIR CONDITIONING 230500 - 8 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

C. Prior to commencing any work, submit data sheets for engineer's approval of all material proposed to be used on this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING:

A. Pipe Insulation:

1. Insulation material shall be a flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular form equal to AP Armaflex, or Aerocell, or FlexTherm. This product meets the requirements as defined in ASTM C 534, “Specification for preformed elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in tubular form.” Insulation materials shall have a closed-cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking which makes it an efficient insulation. Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s or HCFC’s. It is also formaldehyde free, low VOC’s, fiber free, dust free and resists mold and mildew.

2. Materials shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, latest revision. In addition, the product, when

HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, the flame shall not be progressive and all materials shall pass simulated end-use fire tests.

3. Materials shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu- in./h-ft2- °F at a 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518, latest revisions. Materials shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision.

4. When supported with uni-strut an insulation sleeve under the clamp is required equal to Armacell Armafix, Aerocell Aerofix, or Cooper B-Line.

2.2 JACKET FOR OUTDOOR PIPING:

A. All insulation outside (including insulation options) shall be protected with corrugated aluminum jacketing with factory applied moisture barrier. The aluminum jacketing shall be 0.016 thickness and be of 3003 alloy and H-14 temper. Jacketing shall be applied with 2-inch circumferential and 1-1/2 inch longitudinal lap and secured with 3/8 inch wide aluminum bands, 8 inches on center.

B. All elbows shall be covered with 2 piece aluminum insulation covers, manufactured from 110 aluminum alloy in .024" thickness, Childers Aluminum E11-Jacs or equal.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS:

A. Piping for the following systems shall be insulated to the thickness listed:

Item Insulation Thickness (Inches)

Armaflex K = 0.25

Cold Pipes:

Condensate Drain Piping 1/2"

Refrigerant Suction 3/4"

Refrigerant Liquid (TXV in 1/2" outdoor unit)

HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSULATION:

A. All insulation shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces butting all sections firmly together and finishing as specified hereinafter.

B. Armaflex insulation shall be slip fit over all tubing. Under no circumstances shall insulation be slit to fit over pipe already in place. Sufficient length shall be provided at all bends or turns to prevent the insulation from being pulled too tight and cracking. All seams and butt joints shall be adhered and sealed using Armaflex 520 or 520 BLVAdhesive or equal. Direct contact between pipe and hangers shall be avoided. Hanger shall pass outside of a sheet metal protection saddle which shall cover a section of high density insulation (cellular glass or calcium silicate), of sufficient length to support the weight of the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapor barrier shall be continuous behind the saddle or shall be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented thereto.

3.2 ALUMINUM JACKET:

A. Jacketing shall be applied with 2-inch circumferential and 1-1/2 inch longitudinal lap and secured with 3/8 inch wide aluminum bands, 8 inches on center and at joints.

End of Section 230700

HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and supervision to construct complete and operable electrical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. All materials and equipment used shall be new, undamaged and free from any defects.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND OTHER INFORMATION

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the portions of work specified in each and every Section, individually and collectively.

1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard printed commitment in reference to a specific product and normal application, stating that certain acts of restitution will be performed for the Purchaser or Owner by the manufacturer, when and if the product fails within certain operational conditions and time limits. Where the warranty requirements of a specific specification section exceeds the manufacturer's standard warranty, the more stringent requirements will apply and modified manufacturer's warranty shall be provided. In no case shall the manufacturer's warranty be less than one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. 1. Where manufacturer's warranty lists a start date of PO or date of ship, contractor shall purchase extended warranty to ensure warranty period extends to a minimum of 1 year after date of substantial completion.

1.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General: Materials specified by manufacturer's name shall be used unless prior approval of an alternate is given by addenda. Requests for substitutions must be received in the office of the Architect at least 10 days prior to opening of bids.

1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit for review by the Engineer Architect a schedule with engineering data of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work. Submittals shall be supported by descriptive materials, i.e., catalog sheets, product data sheets, diagrams, performance curves and charts published by the manufacturer, warranties, etc., to show conformance to Specifications and Plan requirements; model numbers alone shall not be acceptable. Data submitted for review shall contain all information to indicate compliance with Contract Documents. Complete electrical characteristics shall be provided for all equipment. Submittals for lighting fixtures shall include Photometric Data. The Engineer reserves the right to require samples of any equipment to be submitted for review.

B. The purpose of shop drawing review is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept. The Architect's review of such drawings, schedules, or cuts

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Architect's attention to such deviation at the time of submission, and received written permission from the Architect for such deviations.

C. Where cut sheets include an entire product family, mark all specific items to be utilized for this project on equipment cut sheets. Generic cut sheets with no indication of which items on the cut sheet shall be used will be rejected.

D. Response to Submittals: Shop drawings shall be noted with the following classifications: 1. "Reviewed": No corrections, no marks. Contractor shall submit copies for distribution. 2. "Provide as Corrected": A few minor corrections. Items may be ordered as marked up without further resubmission. Submit shall submit copies for distribution. Formally correct prior to submitting O&M manuals. 3. "Revise and Resubmit": Minor corrections. Items may be ordered at the Contractor's option. Contractor shall resubmit documents with corrections noted. 4. "Rejected": Major corrections required or not in accordance with the contract documents. Contractor shall correct and resubmit documents.

1.6 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

A. Electrical contract drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of electrical equipment. Do not scale electrical plans. Obtain all dimensions from the Architect's dimensioned drawings and field measurements. The Contractor shall review Architectural plans for door swings and built-in equipment; conditions indicated on those plans shall govern for this work.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical equipment with the structural and mechanical equipment and access thereto. Coordinate exterior electrical work with civil and landscaping work.

C. Discrepancies shown on different drawings, between drawings and specifications or between documents and field conditions shall be installed to provide the better quality or greater quantity of work; or, comply with the more stringent requirement; either or both in accordance with the A/E’s interpretation.

1.7 ELECTRICAL WORK SCHEDULE

A. After the award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule (aka milestone chart, or Gantt chart) for review by the Architect/Engineer and Owner at least 10-days prior to beginning work. The Contractor Project Schedule (CPS) shall indicate detailed activities for the projected life of the project. The CPS shall consist of detailed activities and their restraining relationships. It will also detail manpower usage throughout the project. Specific items shall include (but not limited to) the following: 1. Date of on-site arrival of electrical equipment and accessories required for system installation. 2. Estimated dates and duration of all service outages. 3. Estimated start date and completion date for the demolition of each existing panelboard. 4. Estimated start date and completion date for the installation of each panelboard. 5. Estimated dates and duration of required work access to areas that are not in the

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

current phase, or scope of work.

1.8 SUBMITTALS – GENERAL ELECTRICAL

A. Electrical coordination drawings shall be provided as described below: 1. Electrical Rooms: Provide layouts of all electrical rooms using the dimensions of equipment and accessories actually furnished. Locate all ducts and piping entering or crossing these spaces. 2. Feeders over 100 Amps: The routing of main feeders is not shown on the drawings. Actual routing shall be determined by the contractor in accordance with the specifications and shall be coordinated with work by other trades. For underground lines, show all utility crossings. 3. Drawings Format: Drawings shall be prepared at a scale of no less than 1/16”=1’-0” for feeder routes and 1/4”=1’-0” for electrical rooms / equipment yards. Drawing shall be titled to define Project Name, Drawing subject and date prepared. Drawings are to be prepared in AutoCAD or compatible software.

B. Firestopping Submittals shall be provided for each proposed system type prior to installation. Submittal shall include the following: 1. Firestopping Materials 2. Firestopping Installation Drawings for each conduit penetration, cable in metal sleeve penetration, and blank metal sleeve penetration for each type of wall / floor construction encountered.

1.9 SYSTEMS REQUIRING ROUGH-IN

A. Rough-in shall consist of all outlet boxes/raceway systems/supports and sleeves required for the installation of cables/devices by other Divisions and by the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to determine the requirements by reviewing the contract documents and meeting with the Superintendent of the trade involved and Owner’s representative to review submittal data, shop drawings, etc.

B. Sealing of all sleeves, to meet the fire rating of the assembly, whether active or not, is work of this Division.

1.10 EXISTING SERVICES AND FACILITIES

A. Damage to Existing Services: Existing services and facilities damaged by the Contractor through negligence or through use of faulty materials or workmanship shall be promptly repaired, replaced, or otherwise restored to previous conditions by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Interruption of Services: Interruptions of services necessary for connection to or modification of existing systems or facilities shall occur only at prearranged times approved by the Owner. Interruptions shall only occur after the provision of all temporary work and the availability of adequate labor and materials will assure that the duration of the interruption will not exceed the time agreed upon.

C. Removed Materials: Existing materials made unnecessary by the new installation shall be stored on site. They shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be stored at a location

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

and in a manner as directed by the Owner. If classified by the Owner's authorized representative as unsuitable for further use, the material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site at no additional cost to the owner.

D. Contractor shall review drawings for all trades for coordination with existing conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for routing of underground raceways and coordinate with GC and other trades for cutting and repair of existing slabs, parking areas, sidewalks, sheetrock and/or plaster walls, etc.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with contract documents and other trades for routing of ducts, pipes, cable-tray and other components with existing conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for field verifying source of raceways and cabling that are in conflict regardless of whether they serve devices in the area of work or not. The relocation of these raceways to assist in avoiding these conflicts shall also be included at no additional cost to the owner.

F. Contractor shall protect all existing low-voltage cabling from damage. If conflicts arise, contact architect immediately to determine status of cabling. Existing cabling that is damaged during construction shall be replaced by the contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING:

A. Refer to section 078413 for additional requirements.

B. A firestop system shall be used to seal penetrations of electrical conduits and cables through fire-rated partitions per NEC 300.21, and NEC 800.26. The firestop system shall be qualified by formal performance testing in accordance with ASTM E-814, or UL 1479.

C. The firestop system shall consist of a fire-rated caulk type substance and a high temperature fiber insulation. It shall be permanently flexible, waterproof, non-toxic, smoke and gas tight and have a high adhesion to all solids so damming is not required. Only metal conduit shall be used in conjunction with this system to penetrate fire rated partitions. Install in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3M or approved equal.

D. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

E. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRODUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, including handling, anchorage, assembly, connections, cleaning and testing, charging, lubrication, startup, test operation and shut-down of operating equipment. Consult with manufacturer's technical experts, for specific instructions on unique product conditions and unforeseen problems.

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Protection and Identification: Deliver products to project properly identified with names, models numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged or protected to prevent deterioration during shipment, storage and handling. Store in a dry, well ventilated, indoor space, except where prepared and protected by the manufacturer specifically for exterior storage.

C. Permits and Tests: Provide labor, material and equipment to perform all tests required by the governing agencies and submit a record of all tests to the Owner or his representative. Notify the Architect five days in advance of any testing.

D. Install temporary protective covers over equipment enclosures, outlet boxes and similar items after interiors, conductors, devices, etc. are installed, to prevent the entry of construction debris and to protect the installation during finish work performed by others. Do not install device plates, equipment covers or trims until finish work is complete.

E. Clean all equipment, inside and out, upon completion of the work. Scratched or marred surfaces shall be touched-up with touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer.

F. Replace all equipment and materials that become damaged.

G. No more than three phase conductors, each of opposite phases for a three phase WYE system, shall be combined in a single raceway unless written approval is granted by the engineer or noted otherwise on the construction documents. 120 volt and 277 volt receptacle and lighting circuits are except from this requirement, but must meet the requirements of the NEC.

H. Shared neutrals shall not be utilized (including, but not limited to homeruns) unless written permission is obtained from the Engineer for a specific application.

3.2 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain.

B. Store equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Equipment shall include but not be limited to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, motor controllers, uninterruptible power systems, enclosures, controllers, circuit protective devices, cables, wire, light fixtures, electronic equipment, and accessories.

C. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside equipment.

D. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.

E. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.

3.3 UTILITY CONNECTIONS:

A. Coordinate the connection of the electrical system with the local power company. Comply with the requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Pay all utility fees and charges.

3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK:

A. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following requirements are mandatory:

1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the Contractor. The work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.

4. Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is obtained from the Owner/ Architect.

END OF SECTION 260500

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Division 27 and 28 requirements shall be a sub-contract to Division 26. Division 26 shall be responsible for all requirements listed on electrical drawings, and Division 26, 27, and 28 specifications.

B. Section includes building wire and cable and wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL Standard 83 for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL Standard 44 for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. 3. UL 514B – Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 4. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. 5. UL 1569 – Standard for Metal-Clad Cables

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. 5. Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent.

B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Type MC Cable shall not be allowed without written permission from engineer.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data for the following: 1. Wire and Cable 2. Splice Kits 3. Waterproof Wire Connectors

C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to work. Coordinate dimensions with architectural, structural, and civil drawings. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic only and shall not be scaled.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and cable lengths within 10 ft of length shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Southwire 2. AETNA. 3. American Insulated Wire Corp. 4. Colonial Wire 5. General Cable Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor: Copper (sizes #1 AWG and less).

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

2.2 TERMINATIONS

A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper.

B. Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating sealing collars.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specification - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

C. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.

B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

C. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.

E. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.

F. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws.

G. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device, such as circuit breakers.

H. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2-hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars.

I. For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit.

3.4 WIRE COLOR

A. General: 1. For wire sizes 6 AWG and smaller, install wire with insulation colors as designated below. 2. For wire sizes 4 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows:

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

120/208-volt systems: Phase A - Black Phase B - Red Phase C - Blue Neutral - White Ground - Green

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specification - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.

END OF SECTION 260519

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Wire. 3. Mechanical connectors. 4. Exothermic connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100. Refer to Section 09 69 00.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Product Description: 1. Material: Copper-clad steel. 2. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Length: 10 feet (3.0 m).

B. Connector: Connector for exothermic welded connection.

2.2 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper.

B. Foundation Electrodes: 4 AWG.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.

2.3 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. 1. Bonding Jumpers: Compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lock washers. 2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts. 3. Rack and cabinet ground bars: One-hole compression type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

2.4 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and other surface contaminants at connection points.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.

B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142.

B. Install rod electrodes at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground.

C. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.

D. Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Electrically bond steel together. If it is determined that the reinforcing steel cannot be made electrically continuous, install a 4 AWG bare copper conductor in foundation footing around the perimeter of the building.

E. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

F. Bond to lightning protection system. Refer to Section 26 41 00.

G. Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground by means of driven rods or buried electrodes.

H. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.

I. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards with installed number 12 conductor to grounding bus.

J. Grounding electrical system using continuous metal raceway system enclosing circuit conductors in accordance with NEC.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

K. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

E. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

F. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest.

END OF SECTION 260526

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.

C. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.

D. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.

E. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self locking.

2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage (2.8 mm) thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on center.

2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS

A. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. The use of powder-actuated anchors is not allowed.

B. Do not drill or cut structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, and steel ramset fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 5. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 6. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.

B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.

D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.

F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every other floor.

3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches (87 mm) thick and extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00.

B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION 260529

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 5. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.

B. Underground: Provide thin-wall nonmetallic conduit (schedule 40 PVC) with rigid long- sweep 90-degree elbows unless specifically noted otherwise. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.

C. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide thin-wall nonmetallic conduit (schedule 40 PVC). Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.

D. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide galvanized rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

E. Interior Wet and Damp Locations: Provide galvanized rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

G. Exposed Dry Locations in unfinished spaces: Provide rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit where subject to damage (see below for defined locations that are subject to damage), electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 1. Spaces defined as subject to physical damage are as follows: a. Mechanical Rooms below 10' above finished floor. b. Loading Docks. c. Any area with forklift traffic.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit for the following:

1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Conduit bodies. 5. Wireway. 6. Handholes.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch (DN50). 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03.

C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers listed below are basis of design, or can provide products equal to basis of design. 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type.

C. All EMT conduit shall be Anodized with the following color coating: 1. Emergency Life Safety Power: Yellow 2. HVAC Equipment Power: Green 3. HVAC Controls: White (To be provided by mechanical controls contractor) 4. Normal Power: Silver 5. Communications Systems: Black

2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.7 NONMETALLIC TUBING

A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.8 WIREWAY

A. Product Description: General purpose for interior locations, and Raintight type for exterior locations wireway.

B. Cover: Hinged cover with full gaskets.

C. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.

2.9 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer.

C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.

D. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.

C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

D. Fiberglass Concrete composite Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber concrete composite hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch (150 mm x 150 mm) cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass-fiber concrete composite, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough- in.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

E. Do not install raceways or boxes within 1-1/2” of roof decking to prevent damage from roof installation or repair.

3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY

A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.

B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.

E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports

F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.

H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.

I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.

K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch (19 mm). Do not cross conduits in slab.

L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.

M. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.

Q. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to cast boxes.

R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes for power systems. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size.

S. Install no more than equivalent of two 90 degree bends between boxes for communications systems. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size.

T. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

U. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.

V. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.

W. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

X. Close ends and unused openings in wireways, junction boxes, and pull boxes.

3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES

A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.

B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet (3 m) prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.

D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Install with minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls.

H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

M. Support boxes independently of conduit.

N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

P. Do not install junction boxes or pull boxes at locations that can be accessed through existing ceiling with a standard ladder. Maximum height of junction boxes above accessible ceiling or through an access panel in a non-accessible is 4’ above top of ceiling frame.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.

B. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings.

C. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533 - 8 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Underground Warning Tape.

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Install nameplates and labels only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on contrasting background color. See specification sections for specific equipment for nameplate color schemes. If no color scheme is specified for specific equipment, provide black letters on a white background.

B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch (3 mm) high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.2 LABELS

A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white letters on black background.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS

A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: -50 deg F to +284 deg F (-46 deg C to +140 deg C).

B. Legend: 1. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description: 4 inch (100 mm) wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellowwith suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, or adhesive. 5. Install nameplates for the following: a. Panelboards. b. Disconnect Switches. c. Enclosed Circuit Breakers.

C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 2. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation.

E. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.

END OF SECTION

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 260574 - SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Study as outlined in the following specifications.

B. In addition to what is required in the project manual for submittals, a minimum of one hard copy of submittal package shall be provided to the engineer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Registered Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of the engineer.

1.5 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 3. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analy- sis 4. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings 5. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 6. IEEE 1584 – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers 2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclo- sures 3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rat- ed on a Symmetrical Current Basis 4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories 5. ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of a Sinusoidal Current Wave and Normal-Frequency Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of Fault Cur- rents C. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition

a. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STUDIES

A. Contractor to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as prepared by equipment manufacturer. By using the equipment manufacturer the study allows coordination of proper breakers, fuses, and current transformers. The coordination study shall begin with the utility company's feeder protective device and include all of the electrical protective devices down to and include the largest feeder circuit breaker, power distribution panelboards, and include all new and existing elevator protective devices. The study shall also include variable frequency drives, and protective devices associated with variable frequency drives.

B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.2 DATA COLLECTION

A. Contractor shall furnish all field data as required by the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing.

B. Source combination may include present and future utility supplies, motors, and generators.

C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided by Owner or Contractor.

D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors < 50 hp grouped together. The Contractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study requirements.

2.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY

A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE Standards 141, latest edition.

B. Provide the following: 1. Calculation methods and assumptions 2. Selected base per unit quantities 3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated with available fault at each bus, and interrupting rating of devices noted 4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics 5. Typical calculations 6. Tabulations of calculated quantities 7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations

C. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each: 1. Electric utility’s supply termination point 2. Incoming switchboard 3. Branch circuit panelboards 4. Other significant locations throughout the system

D. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

E. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings 2. Adequacy of switchboards and panelboard bus bracing to withstand short-circuit stresses 3. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

4. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current

2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on log-log scale paper.

B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered.

C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable: 1. Electric utility’s protective device 2. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands 3. Conductor damage curves 4. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable 5. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points 6. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center

F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection.

2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal.

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all switchboards and panelboards in 208 volt systems.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary.

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2.

2.6 REPORT SECTIONS

A. Input Data: 1. Utility three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with associated X/R ratios 2. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines with associated X/R ratios 3. Cable type, construction, size, # per phase, length, impedance and conduit type

B. Short-Circuit Data: 1. Source fault impedance 2. X to R ratios 3. Asymmetry factors 4. Motor contributions 5. Short circuit Kva 6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents

C. Recommended Protective Device Settings: 1. Phase and Ground Relays: a. Current transformer ratio. b. Current setting. c. Time setting. d. Instantaneous setting. e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings. f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable. 2. Circuit Breakers: a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). b. Adjustable time-current characteristic. c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude 2. Device clearing time 3. Duration of arc 4. Arc flash boundary 5. Working distance 6. Incident energy 7. Hazard Risk Category

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD ADJUSTMENT

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Notify Architect / Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications.

D. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the field engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall be provided on all components manufactured by the engineering service parent manufacturing company.

3.2 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The vendor shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASH HAZARD”, and shall include the following information: 1. Location designation 2. Nominal voltage 3. Flash protection boundary 4. Hazard risk category 5. Incident energy 6. Working distance 7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings. 1. For each 208 volt panelboard, one arc flash label shall be provided 2. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided

E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.3 ARC FLASH TRAINING

A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard For Electrical Safety Requirements For Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals. The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET).

END OF SECTION

SHORT CIRCUIT, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 05 83 - EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specification - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

C. Signed Letter from Contractor indicating that shop drawings have been reviewed for all equipment requiring electrical connections that are furnished by other divisions prior to ordering equipment.

D. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specification - Execution and Closeout Requirements.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 Specification - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 83 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Prior to ordering electrical gear, compare to electrical requirements listed on electrical drawings for each piece of equipment. Notify architect / engineer immediately of any changes.

D. Determine connection locations and requirements.

E. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.

F. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Provide electrical connections for all electrically driven equipment. Final connections are electrical work, unless specifically noted otherwise. Obtain a copy of the shop drawings of equipment. Review shop drawings to verify electrical characteristics and to determine rough-in requirements, final connection requirements, location of disconnect switch, etc. Notify the General Contractor if the information received is ambiguous or incomplete. Keep a copy of these shop drawings at the project site throughout the course of construction.

B. Equipment to be connected includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. HVAC Equipment 2. Site Lighting 3. Control Systems

C. The design of circuits for electrically driven equipment is based on the product of one manufacturer and may not be representative of all acceptable manufacturers. If equipment furnished has differing characteristics, make necessary adjustments to circuit components at no additional cost to the Owner, subject to the approval of the Architect.

D. Provide motor starters and disconnects for all mechanical equipment unless provided by the mechanical contractor.

2.2 CORD AND PLUGS

A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment.

C. Cord Construction: Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 83 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specification - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections above accessible ceiling finishes.

B. Disconnect abandoned utilization equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed.

C. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods as specified.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Make electrical connections.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specification - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 83 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations.

END OF SECTION 260583

Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 83 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: 1. Remote control lighting relays. 2. Lighting contactors. 3. Time Clocks 4. Switches. 5. Switch plates. 6. Photocells. 7. Photocell control unit.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 4. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Lighting controls shall be based on lighting control scheme as defined on the drawings. Contractor is responsible for providing system, components, wiring, and programming as required to provide all automatic and manual control functions as defined.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Time Line for delivery, installation, and factory start-up. Lighting controls shall be completed, and factory commissioned prior to final walk-through.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components and accessories. 1. One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number and type of switches or devices. 2. Include typical wiring diagrams for each component.

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3. Plans showing locations of all lighting control devices, and associated coverage patterns. 4. Relay Panel Schedules including circuit breaker origination, load description, and auxiliary control inputs.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard product data for each system component.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products and system meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record the following information: 1. Actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching arrangements. 2. Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and numbered, system components and devices.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit replacement parts numbers. 2. Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions and operating instructions. 3. Recommended renewal parts list. 4. Product Components and System Warranty Information.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept components on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect components by storing in manufacturer’s containers indoor protected from weather.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for all control devices and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Furnish two of each switch type.

C. Furnish two of each photocell type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Exterior Lighting Controls Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Intermatic 2. Tork

2.2 REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAYS

A. Product Description: Heavy duty, single-coil momentary contact mechanically held remote control relays.

B. Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at listed voltage. Rated for lighting applications with LED lamps.

C. Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.

D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. GE 2. Cutler-Hammer 3. Square D 4. Siemens. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.

C. Configuration: Electrically held 2 wire control.

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

E. Poles: To match circuit configuration and control function.

F. Contact Rating: Conductor overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads.

G. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

2.4 SWITCHES

A. Wall Switch: Specification Grade, momentary pushbutton type for overriding relays. 1. Color: See wiring devices Section 26 27 26.

B. Switch may be low-voltage type, tied to lighting control system, or line-voltage type with integral relay. See plans for additional information on lighting control scheme.

2.5 SWITCH PLATES

A. Product Description: Specification Grade. 1. Color: See wiring devices Section 26 27 26.

2.6 OCCUPANCY / VACANCY SENSOR

A. Sensors shall be field selectable for either Occupancy Sensing or Vacancy Sensing.

B. Separate sensitivity and time delay adjustments with LED indication of sensed movement. User adjustable time-delay: 30 seconds to 20 minutes.

C. Furnish with manual override.

D. Operation: Silent.

E. Room Sensors: Direction or Omni-Direction with coverage pattern as required to cover 100% of space.

2.7 PHOTOCELLS

A. Interior: Provide closed loop sensor mounted as required to provide accurate measurements within the daylighting zone.

B. Exterior: Rated for exterior lighting voltage as indicated on plan. Mount high on wall and aim north.

C. Sensor Devices: Each sensor employs photo diode technology to allow linear response to daylight within illuminance range.

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1. Exterior Lighting: Hooded sensor, horizontally mounted, employing flat lens, and working range. Entire sensor encased in optically clear epoxy resin. a. Range shall be 1-5 fc to close circuit, 3-15fc to open circuit. b. Sensor shall have up to a 2-minute time delay for both close and open feature. 2. Indoor Lighting: Sensor shall measure both the daylight contribution and the controlled electric light contribution. a. Photocell shall have an extremely linear response with greater than 1% accuracy over the sensed range. b. Photosensor shall utilize an internal photocell that measures only in the visible spectrum and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photocell shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers. c. Photosensor shall provide dimming over the full range. d. Photosensor shall have a control range of 20-60 footcandles.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide electrical connection to relay panels, time clocks, or other controllers that require powered connections. Coordinate all connection points with system shop drawings.

B. Mount [switches,] [occupancy sensors,] [and] [photocells] to provide system control to match scheme indicated on drawings.

C. Occupancy / Vacancy Sensors shall be located and shielded as required to optimally cover 100% of the space and prevent nuisance detection from outside of the room.

D. Install wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19 and manufacturers written instructions.

E. Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel.

F. Mount relay as indicated on final shop drawings. Wire numbered relays in panel to control power to each load. Install relays to be accessible. Allow space around relays for ventilation and circulation of air.

G. Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load. When multiple circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to indicate originating panel designation.

H. Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.

B. Furnish services for check, test, and start-up. Perform the following services: 1. Check installation of panelboards. 2. Test operation of remote controlled devices. 3. Repair or replace defective components. 4. Manufacturer's factory authorized respresentative shall start-up and verify a complete fully functional system.

C. Furnish [4] [8] hours to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Owner of training date.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Test each system component after installation to verify proper operation.

C. Confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. A commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all building systems, which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day of technician’s time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to configure each device are readily available.

B. The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting control hardware to become familiar with the specific products. The agent shall accompany the manufacturer’s technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing, calibration and configuration of the products.

C. Commissioning must be completed prior to substantial completion. Punchlists will not be performed until lighting controls are in complete operation.

END OF SECTION

Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Include all of the following information: 1. Indicate outline and support point dimensions. 2. Product data 3. Enclosure type 4. Circuit directory 5. Integrated short circuit ampere rating 6. Device Nameplate Data

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner’s current keying system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3. Eaton 4. Siemens 5. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.

B. Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper and neutral ground bus in each panelboard.

C. See circuit breaker section below for information on types of circuits required.

D. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1 1. Indoor Locations - Type 1, unless noted otherwise below.

E. Cabinet Front: Door-in-door type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock all keyed alike, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

F. All panelboards shall be hinged "door in door" type with: 1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized parts. 2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not acceptable. 3. Both inner and outer doors shall open left to right.

G. All panelboards shall have bolt-on style breakers.

H. Provisions for future breakers shall be fully bussed complete with all necessary mounting hardware.

2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

B. Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground and neutral bus in each panelboard.

C. See circuit breaker section below for information on types of circuits required.

D. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1 1. Indoor Locations - Type 1, unless noted otherwise below. 2. Outdoor Locations - Type 3R.

E. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide.

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Cabinet Front: Door-in-door type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock all keyed alike, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

G. All panelboards shall be hinged "door in door" type with: 1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized parts. 2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not acceptable. 3. Both inner and outer doors shall open left to right.

H. All panelboards shall have bolt-on style breakers.

I. Provisions for future breakers shall be fully bussed complete with all necessary mounting hardware.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. For Circuit breakers rated at 1000 amps and over: Provide low voltage AC power circuit breaker, with fixed mounting, stored energy and solid state trip devices. 1. Provide individual adjustable solid-state elements as an integral part of the solid- state trip devices for complete system selective coordination. Breakers shall have LSGI settings. 2. Position indicator: Provide an indicator visible from the front of the unit to indicate whether the breaker is open or closed. 3. Trip button: Provide a mechanical trip button accessible from the front of the door to trip the breaker. 4. Padlocking: Include provisions for padlocking the breaker in the open position. 5. Trip devices shall have the following features: a. Trip device in each pole. b. Metering, voltage, current memory and LED display. c. Mechanically and electrically trip free. d. Long time element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate, and minimum time delay bands. e. Short time element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate, and minimum time delay bands. f. Ground fault element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate and minimum time delay bands. g. Maintenance setting option to reduce Arc Flash hazards.

B. For Circuit breakers rated over 200 amps: Provide adjustable trip molded case, solid state adjustable trip type circuit breakers. 1. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers (where scheduled): Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 2. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 3. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

4. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows: a. Ampere Setting (Continuous) b. Long time band. c. Short time trip point. d. Short time delay. e. Instantaneous trip point.

C. For all circuit breakers 200 amps and smaller: Provide Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip type Circuit Breakers. 1. Type SWD for lighting circuits. 2. Type HACR for all air conditioning equipment circuits. 3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. 4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

D. Circuit breakers serving elevators shall have adjustable long-time setting and shall be provided with a shunt trip coil rated for 120 volt operation. Breaker shall also have a set of Form C contacts. Connect shunt trip coil to operate as indicated on the drawings.

E. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit breaker operation. Key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.5 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING

A. Devices which achieve the level of fault protection indicated by means of "series" or "integrated" rating shall be acceptable unless specifically indicated on the drawings. All panelboards shall be fully rated.

B. For existing equipment, provide circuit breakers with short circuit current ratings that match ratings indicated on panel, if no markings indicate panelboard rating, then provide ratings that match highest rated circuit breaker in panelboard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Install panelboards plumb.

C. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.

D. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.

E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

F. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch (DN27). Identify each as SPARE.

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.

H. Provide a circuit breaker locking device for all circuit breakers that serve fire alarm system panels and power supplies. These circuit breakers shall be locked in the "closed" position. Identify these circuit breakers with a red marking.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.

D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

C. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

D. Clean all debris from panel interiors.

3.4 LABELING

A. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

B. Provide nameplates on all new electrical panelboards. Indicate the following information on the nameplate: 1. Panel Name 2. Panel fed from 3. Voltage, Phase, Wire, Short Circuit Current Rating 4. Date Installed

C. Use the following color coding for panelboard nameplates: 1. Normal Power: White with Black Letters. 2. Emergency Critical: Orange with Black Letters. 3. Emergency Life Safety: Yellow with Black Letters.

D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads.

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 6 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

E. Identify load served and location by room names assigned by user, not by room numbers on floor plans. Note spares and spaces as such. Spare circuit breakers shall be left in the open position.

F. Provide ARC flash identification per NFPA 70E. ARC Flash levels shall be provided per the ARC Flash study provided by the contractor.

3.5 CLEARANCE AND WORKSPACE

A. Maintain workspace and clearances as required by the NEC for voltages encountered. No pipes or ducts shall pass above the outline of the panelboard. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to make sure that other trades do not encroach on this space.

END OF SECTION

Panelboards 26 24 16 - 7 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multioutlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following manufacturers: 1. Arrow Hart 2. Eagle 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. Legrand 6. Lutron

Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

7. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

2.2 WALL SWITCHES

A. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, UL20 and Fed Spec WS-896 AC only snap switch. Switch shall have back and side wire options.

B. Body and Handle: Nylon with toggle handle. Color as selected by architect.

C. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics.

2.3 WALL DIMMERS

A. Product Description: NEMA WD 1; Type or Style as indicated on Drawings.

B. Type must be listed as compatible by the manufacturer with the ballast or driver supporting associated fixtures.

C. Body and Handle: Plastic with linear slide. Color as selected by architect.

D. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings; 600 watts minimum. Contractor is responsible for updating loads based on lighting substitutions from basis of design.

E. Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance.

2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. Product Description: Tamper-Resistant, NEMA WD 1, UL498 and Fed Spec WC-596 Commercial Specification Grade receptacle. Receptacle shall have back and side wire options.

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified.

C. GFCI Receptacle (2015 UL 943): Duplex receptacle with integral self-test ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. Self-test system conducts an automatic test every 15 minutes minimum. If device fails the self-test, visual and audible indicators provide an alert and power to unit is disconnected. 1. GFCI receptacles shall not be used as feed through devices. 2. Where devices are installed behind equipment where not easily accessible, a dead-front GFCI device may be used with a standard device for GFCI protection. See plans for additional information. 3. Where installed in wet locations, the device shall be listed weather resistant type.

D. All Receptacle types shall be NEMA 5-20 unless noted specifically noted otherwise.

E. Device Body: PVC back body with Nylon Face. Color as selected by architect.

F. Special Purpose Receptacles: Provide heavy-duty type as indicated on the drawings.

Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Impact resistant nylon (color to match associated device); or smooth-stainless steel, as determined by the Architect.

B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: All devices installed outdoor and indoor devices specifically indicated, shall be provided with weatherproof covers. Covers shall be metallic and of the type that maintain weatherproof integrity when in-use and not in-use, as required by the NEC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices plumb and level.

B. Install switches with OFF position down.

C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.

H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors

Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.

I. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 and as indicated on drawings.

B. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with underfloor raceway service fittings provided under Section 26 05 39.

C. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service fittings provided under Section 26 05 34.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Verify each receptacle device is energized.

E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 28 19

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section includes fusible switches.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: 1. Switch ratings (Voltage, Amperage, Poles, SSCR) 2. Enclosure type and dimensions. 3. Control Wiring Diagrams

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

Enclosed Switches 26 28 19 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following manufacturers: 1. GE Electric 2. Square D 3. Eaton 4. Siemens 5. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

B. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

C. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.

2.3 SWITCH RATINGS

A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings.

B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (15-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes) or protected by Class L fuses (800-1200 ampere).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Maintain access to existing enclosed switches and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

B. Clean and repair existing enclosed switches to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

B. Height: 5 feet (1500 mm) to operating handle.

Enclosed Switches 26 28 19 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

3.3 LABELING

A. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. Nameplates on all switch enclosures wherein circuits are modified or installed shall indicate the following: 1. Equipment Switch Serves 2. Panel and Circuit Switch is served from. 3. Voltage, Phase, Wire, Short Circuit Current Rating 4. Date Installed.

B. Use the following color coding for switch nameplates: 1. Normal Power: White with Black Letters. 2. Emergency Life Safety: Yellow with Black Letters.

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.

END OF SECTION

Enclosed Switches 26 28 19 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 41 00 - FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes air terminals, interconnecting conductors, grounding, and bonding for lightning protection.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components. 2. UL 96A - Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Conductor system protecting entire building and having UL Master Label.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96.

D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and inspection.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Certificate of Compliance: Submit certificate from Underwriter's Laboratories indicating approval of lightning protection systems.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors.

Facility Lightning Protection 26 41 00 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 780.

B. Perform Work in accordance with UL 96A and furnish Master Label.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years experience.

C. Inspection Agency: Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 Specifications - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate Work with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Product Listing: UL 96.

B. Air Terminals: 1. Material: Copper. 2. Configuration: Solid. 3. Use adhesive base for single-ply roof installations. 4. Air Terminal for Chimney: Lead-coated copper. 5. Grounding Rods: Solid copper. 6. Ground Plate: Copper. 7. Conductors: a. Material: Copper. b. Configuration: Cable.

C. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze.

Facility Lightning Protection 26 41 00 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with UL 96A.

B. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors.

C. Conceal interior conductors within building finishes. Conceal exterior conductors where practical.

D. Bond exterior metal bodies on building to lightning protection system.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with UL 96A.

END OF SECTION 264100

Facility Lightning Protection 26 41 00 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 264300 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: Surge Protection Devices Type 1 and Type 2 Devices

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. 2. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 3. IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2. UL 1449 Third Edition - Surge Protective Devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit the following 1. Unit Dimensions and Weights 2. Wiring configuration. 3. Warranty Statement 4. Current Ratings 5. Clamping Voltages 6. Response Time

C. Test Reports: 1. Indicate Let-Through voltage test data. 2. Submit spectrum analysis of each unit. 3. Submit test reports from nationally recognized independent testing laboratory verifying suppressors can survive published surge current rating.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and connection requirements.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264300 - 1 12/13/2019 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify transient voltage surge suppression device complies with UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Voltage Ratings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standard: Comply with the latest edition of the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise stated in this document: 1. UL 1449 3rd Edition 2009 Revision 2. UL 1283. 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Guide for Surge Testing for equipment connected to Low- Voltage AC Power Circuits. 5. IEEE 1100 Emerald Book. 6. National Fire Protective Association (NFPA 70: National Electrical Code).

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide a 5 year product warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following manufacturers: 1. Emerson / APT 2. Current Technologies 3. Thor 4. GE Electric 5. Square D 6. Eaton 7. Siemens 8. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements

2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Declared Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) shall be greater than 115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage and in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in the nominal discharge surge current test of UL1449 3rd Edition, section 37.7. MCOV values claimed based on the component’s value or on the 30-minute 115% operational voltage test, section 38 in UL1449 will not be accepted.

B. Unit shall have not more than 10% deterioration or degradation of the UL1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protective Rating VPR) due to repeated surges. Unit shall have a monitoring option available to be able to test and determine the percentage of protective available at all times.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264300 - 2 12/13/2019 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Protection Modes: SVR(6kV, 500A) and UL1449 3rd Edition VPR(6kV, 3kA) for grounded WYE/delta circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-Phase/4 wire circuits shall be as follows and comply with test procedures outlined in UL1449 3rd Edition section 37.6

System Mode MCOV B3 C3 Comb. UL 1449 UL 1449 Voltage Ringwave Wave Second Edition Third Edition SVR Rating VPR Rating 120/240 L-N 150 325/375 650/775 400/400 700/700 120/208 L-G 150 400/450 650/825 500/500 700/700 N-G 150 350/350 500/500 500/500 900/900 L-L 300 400/500 950/1250 700/700 900/900 277/480 L-N 320 550/600 1125/1225 900/900 1000/1000 L-G 320 850/875 1075/1225 1000/1000 1200/1200 N-G 320 700/700 900/900 800/800 1200/1200 L-L 550 650/750 1950/2200 1500/1500 1800/1800

D. Electrical Noise Filter- each unit shall include a high performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric noise shall be as follows using the MIL-STD-220B insertion loss test method. 1. 100 kHz at 44 db or better. 2. All other frequencies should be 32 db or better.

E. Each fuse shall be individually sealed in a manner that eliminates the potential for cross arcing.

F. Each unit shall provide the following features:

1. Phase Indicator lights, Form C dry contacts, surge counter and audible alarm. 2. Field testable while installed. 3. Measuring capability to indicate the percent protective available in SPD.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Each unit shall be installed per Manufacturer’s recommended installation and wiring practices.

B. The UL 1449 Voltage Protective Rating (VPR) shall be permanently affixed to the SPD unit.

C. The UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Surge Current Rating shall be a minimum of 20kA.

D. Surge Current Rating of device shall be as noted on drawings.

E. The SCCR rating of the SPD shall be 200kAIC without requiring an upstream protective device for safe operation.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264300 - 3 12/13/2019 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

F. Locate SPDs and associated circuit breaker in panelboard or switchboard so as to minimize conductor lengths and bends.

1. Conductors between SPD and circuit breaker shall be no more than 24” in length. 2. There shall be no sharp bends or kinks in conductors. 3. Conductors shall be continuous from device to breaker. 4. Do not bundle or tie-wrap conductors together. 5. If conductor’s must exceed 24” in length or contain multiple bends due to location constraints, contractor shall provide manufacturer’s specialty cable for excessive lengths at no additional cost.

G. The SPD manufacturer’s technician shall perform a system checkout and start-up in the field to assure proper installation, operation and to initiate the warranty of the system. The technician will be required to do the following: 1. Verify voltage clamping levels using the DTS-2 test equipment. 2. Verify N-G connection when applicable. 3. Record information to product signature card for each product installed.

END OF SECTION

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264300 - 4 12/13/2019 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity- Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).

B. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) 1. LM-79 - Approved Method: electrical and Photometric Testing of Solid-State Lighting Devices. 2. LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light Sources. 3. TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 - American National Standard for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products 2. SSL-1 - Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)

E. Underwriters laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

D. Submittal Data for LED fixtures shall be based on the specified "basis-of-design" fixture and shall include the following: 1. Wattage 2. Color Temperature 3. CRI

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

4. Distribution Pattern 5. Total Lumen Output for Fixture Assembly based on the data above. 6. Submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, or other 3rd party testing reports that include the information above.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. See Lighting fixture schedule on plans for information on luminaires. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named from the first manufacturer listed in the schedule. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified, or a prior approved manufacturer. 2. A prior approved manufacturer does not specifically approve a fixture. It only indicates that the manufacturer can provide a fixture equal to the specified. 3. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Provide complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as required to provide a complete working system mounted to or recessed in wall or ceiling system as described on Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans.

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

A. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL standards as shown on the drawings and as specified.

B. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant.

C. LED fixtures shall be complete assemblies. Fixtures designed around a different lamp source with an LED type replacement lamp shall not be accepted.

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Lighting shall be completely diffused through internal shielding, or fixture lens. Multiple Individual Diodes shall not be visible through the lens of the fixture.

E. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. 2. Minimum CRI of 80 unless otherwise specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3. Color Temperatures for each fixture shall be enclosed inside a 3-step MacAdam ellipse. 4. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. 5. Total Fixture Light Output in lumens within ±5% of Lumens listed in Lighting Fixture Schedule. 6. Total Fixture Efficacy in Lumens / Watt within ±5% of "Basis-of-Design" fixture.

F. LED drivers, modules, and reflectors shall be accessible for servicing and replacement from below the ceiling.

2.3 LED DRIVERS

A. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. 2. Minimum operating Ambient Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) 3. Include integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. 4. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.

B. Extend existing interior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

C. Clean and repair existing interior luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.

B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling framing.

C. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

D. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

E. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings.

F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

G. Connect luminaires to branch circuits using flexible conduit.

H. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.

I. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.

J. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

C. Operate new fluorescent lamps installed in a dimming system at full output for 100 hours to prevent flickering or instability. Provide this same burn-in everytime fixture is re- lamped.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 265100

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 52 00 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section includes emergency lighting units and exit signs.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. Underwriter Laboritories (UL) 1. UL1008 – Transfer Switch Equipment

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.

C. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size.

Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Manufacturers: See Lighting fixture schedule on plans for information on luminaires. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named from the first manufacturer listed in the schedule. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified, or a prior approved manufacturer. 2. A prior approved manufacturer does not specifically approve a fixture. It only indicates that the manufacturer can provide a fixture equal to the specified. 3. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Self-contained LED emergency lighting unit.

C. Battery: 1.5 hour capacity.

D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.

E. Remote Fixtures: Match fixtures on unit.

F. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.

G. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply.

H. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection.

I. Input Voltage: As indicated on drawings.

2.2 EXIT SIGNS

B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture.

C. Housing: As indicated on drawings.

D. Face: As indicated on Drawings.

Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

E. Directional Arrows: As indicated on Drawings with Universal type for field adjustment.

F. Battery: 1.5 hour capacity.

G. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.

H. Lamps: LED.

2.3 LED SYSTEM EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. Product Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of luminaire. 1. Battery packs shall be installed at the factory inside the ballast compartment. 2. For recessed downlights, battery packs shall be installed on the fixture frame to allow for access from below. The charging light and test switch shall be discreetly installed on the top of the reflector and shall be accessible/visible from below.

B. Emergency ballast shall contain a maintenance-free, sealed high-temperature nickel- cadmium or nickel-metal hydride battery with an expected service life of not less than 10 years.

C. Emergency Battery Packs: 1. Constant Power 5-watt, 7-watt, 10-watt, or 12-watt unit as defined in contract documents. 2. The emergency driver shall accommodate an LED load with a forward voltage requirement ranging from 10 to 60 VDC. 3. The output voltage sensing shall be automatic and instantaneous with a resulting, inversely-proportional current to maintain constant power to the LED array with an output tolerance of +/- 3%. The unit shall supply the rated load for a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. 4. The output power to the LED load during emergency operation shall be held constant from the start throughout the entire emergency run time resulting in no loss or degradation of the light source during emergency operation.

D. The unit shall be furnished with an electronic, AC-lockout circuit which will connect the battery when the AC circuit is activated, and an electronic brownout circuit which will enable a transfer to emergency operation when utility power dips below an acceptable level.

E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from outside of assembled luminaire.

F. Where field installation of emergency ballasts are specifically noted on drawings, provide emergency ballast with 2-wire AC input. Ballasts shall be universal voltage type compatible with 120 thru 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz and be UL listed to Category Control Number (CCN) FTBV, Emergency Lighting-Emitting-Diode Drivers for field

Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

installation. Maximum remote mounting distance of the emergency driver shall be 50- feet.

2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING MINI-INVERTERS (Less than 1000-watts)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Iota Engineering 2. Bodine 3. Myers 4. Perfect Power Systems 5. Substitutions: Division 01 Specifications - Product Requirements.

B. Emergency lighting inverter shall be provided by a Bodine ELI Series inverter or prior approved equal with the following characteristics: 1. The device shall comply with the standards set forth in UL 924, “Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment”, and UL Listed for installation for field installation. Emergency illumination shall exceed the NEC and Life Safety Code (NFPA-LSC) requirements. 2. Upon failure of normal power, the device shall instantly begin providing emergency power to the connected lighting load for a minimum of 90 minutes. The device shall support lumen output at 91% of the lamp’s rating throughout the 90-minute duration. 3. The device shall operate at 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz and an ambient temperature of 68 degrees F to 86 degrees F. 4. The device shall produce a true sine wave output. 5. The unit shall be provided with a 5-year full coverage warranty.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned emergency lighting units, exit signs, lamps, and accessories.

B. Extend existing emergency lighting and exit sign installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

C. Clean and repair existing emergency lighting units and exit signs remaining or are to be reinstalled. Provide full 90-minute test on all battery backed lighting systems and exit signs noted to remain in place. Indicate to Architect all units that do not pass test.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height.

B. Install surface-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

C. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.

D. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.

E. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuits as indicated on Drawings.

F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit.

G. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.

H. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 Specifications - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Operate each unit after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements:Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Aim and adjust lamp fixtures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated on Drawings.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Division 01 Specifications - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Relamp emergency lighting units having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - 5 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

B. Section includes exterior luminaries, poles, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Division 01 Specifications - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures and Specification 260500 – Common Work Results for Electrical: Submittal Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire.

C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

D. Submittal Data for LED Fixtures shall be based on specified "basis-of-design" fixture and shall include the following: 1. Wattage 2. Color Temperature 3. CRI 4. Distribution Pattern

Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 1 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

5. Total Lumen Output for Fixture Assembly based on the data above. 6. Submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, or other 3rd party testing reports that include the information above.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each lamp installed.

C. Furnish two gallons of touch-up paint for each different painted finish and color.

D. Furnish two ballasts of each lamp type installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINARIES

Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 2 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Product Description: Provide complete exterior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as required to provide a complete working system mounted as described in contract documents.

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

A. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL standards as shown on the drawings and as specified.

B. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant.

C. LED fixtures shall be complete assemblies. Fixtures designed around a different lamp source with an LED type replacement lamp shall not be accepted.

D. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. 2. Minimum CRI of 70 unless otherwise specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3. Color Temperatures for each fixture shall be enclosed inside a 3-step MacAdam ellipse. 4. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. 5. Total Fixture Light Output in lumens shall be no less than 95% of Lumens listed in Lighting Fixture Schedule. 6. Total Fixture Efficacy in Lumens / Watt shall be no less than 95% of "Basis-of- Design" fixture.

E. LED drivers, modules, and reflectors shall be accessible for servicing and replacement.

2.3 LED DRIVERS

B. Provide LED drivers with step-dim configuration as noted on plans. Systems shall conform to the following: 1. Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp(s) between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level: 100% b. Low-Level: 50% 2. They distribute even light across all LEDs and boards in entire fixture. Fixture shall not accomplish steps by switching grouped LEDs or boards. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated.

C. Provide dimming drivers where noted on fixture schedule. Dimming systems shall conform to the following:

Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 3 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

1. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system indicated. 2. Maximum inrush current of 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers. 3. Class A sound Rating. 4. Drivers shall track evenly across multiple fixtures at all light levels. 5. Dimming Range shall be continuous from 100 percent to 10 percent relative light output minimum. See drawings for other applications that may require a more stringent dimming range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and Project conditions.

B. Verify foundations are ready to receive fixtures.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned exterior luminaries.

B. Extend existing exterior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

C. Clean and repair existing exterior luminaries to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Bond and ground luminaries and metal accessories in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation.

C. Measure illumination levels and submit to engineer for review. 1. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 4 TOWN OF LEXINGTON PROJECT ICE HOUSE LEXINGTON, SC

B. Aim and adjust luminaries to provide illumination levels and distribution as indicated on Drawings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Relamp luminaries having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 265600

Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 5

Table of Contents